-PRELIMINARYtechnical user manual electronic controller for Chiller/Heat pump up to 4 steps
1 SUMMARY
1
SUMMARY
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………2
2
How to use this manual
……………………………………………………………………………………………………..4
3
Introduction
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………5
3.1
Components
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 5
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
Energy 400
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5
Extension
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………5
Keyboards
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….5
CF (Control Fan) Modules
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5
Copy Card
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….5
Serial Interface (EWTK)
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5
Param Manager
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5
4
Installation
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..6
4.1
Connection diagrams
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 6
4.2
Configuration of analogue inputs
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 6
4.3
Configuration of digital inputs
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 8
4.4
Configuration of outputs
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
Power outputs
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….9
Low voltage outputs
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..9
Serial outputs
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..9
4.5
Physical quantities and units of measurement
……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9
User Interface…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………10
5.1
Keys
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10
5.2
Display
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10
5.2.1
5.2.2
Display
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10
Led
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10
5.3
Wall-mounted keyboard
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………11
5.4
Programming
parameters
– Menu levels……………………………………………………………………………………………………………11
5.5
Visibility of
parameters
and submenus………………………………………………………………………………………………………………14
5.5.1
Copy Card
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….14
6
System configuration
………………………………………………………………………………………………………..15
6.1
Compressors
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….15
6.2
Compressor configuration
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………15
6.2.1
6.2.2
Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….16
Compressor timing
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..17
6.3
Condensation fan
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….18
6.3.1
6.3.2
Fan configuration
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..18
Fan control configuration
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..18
6.4
Reversing valves
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….19
6.5
Hydraulic pump
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….19
6.6
Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters
…………………………………………………………………………………………………….19
6.7
Internal fan
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………19
6.8
Condensation-
Defrost
probes……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..19
7
Temperature control functions
………………………………………………………………………………………….21
7.1
Setting set points
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….21
7.2
Dynamic Set point
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..21
7.3
Load control
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….23
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
Compressor control – regulation algorithm
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..23
Condensation fan control
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..24
Combined or Separate Condensation
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….26
Hydraulic pump control
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………26
Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater control
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..27
Reversing valve control
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..27
8
Functions
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………28
8.1
Recording hours of operation
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………28
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
2
8.2
Defrost
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..28
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
Defrost start
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..28
Control during defrost
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….29
Defrost end
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….29
9
Parameters
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………31
9.1
Description of Parameters
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………31
9.2
Parameters table
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..36
10
Diagnostics
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………40
10.1
List of alarms
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………40
11
Technical features
…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….46
11.1
Technical data
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………46
11.2
Electromechanical features
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….46
11.3
Regulations
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………46
12
Use of the device
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………47
12.1
Permitted use
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..47
12.2
Forbidden use
………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..47
13
Responsibility and residual risks
………………………………………………………………………………………..48
14
Glossary
……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………49
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
3
References
Cross references
Icons for emphasis:
2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
x
This manual is designed to permit quick, easy reference with the following features:
References
column:
A column to the left of the text contains
references
to subjects discussed in the text to help you locate the information you need quickly and easily.
Cross references
:
All words written in italics are referenced in the subject index to help you find the page containing details on this subject; supposing you read the following text:
”when the alarm is triggered, the
compressors
will be shut down”
The italics mean that you will find a reference to the page on the topic of
compressors
listed under the item
compressors
in the index.
If you are consulting the manual “on-line” (using a computer), words which appear in italics are hyperlinks: just click on a word in italics with the mouse to go directly to the part of the manual that discusses this topic.
Some segments of text are marked by icons appearing in the
references
column with the meanings specified below:
Take note: information on the topic under discussion which the user ought to keep in mind
Tip: a recommendation which may help the user to understand and make use of the information supplied on the topic under discussion.
Warning! :
information which is essential for preventing negative consequences for the system or a hazard to personnel, instruments, data, etc., and which users MUST read with care.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
4
3 INTRODUCTION
x
Energy 400
is a compact device that permits control of air conditioning units of the following types:
• air-air
• air-water
• water-water
• motor-condensing
The controller can manage machines with up to four
power step
s distributed in a maximum of 2
cooling
circuits (for example, 2 circuits, with 2
compressors
per circuit).
Main characteristics:
•
Outflowing water temperature control
• Condensation control
•
2 inputs which may be configured for NTC or 4-20mA (through
parameters
)
• 11 configurable
digital inputs
+ (4 four optional)
•
Dynamic set point
• Setting of
parameters
from the
keyboard
, with a personal computer or with a interface module
•
Remote keyboard
(100 m) which may be connected up directly without serial interfaces.
• 3 4-20 mA
outputs
•
Control of 1, 2, 3, or 4
compressors
.
3.1 Components
We will now look at the basic
components
and accessories in the system and how they are connected.
3.1.1 Energy 400
The basic module is an electronic card for connection with I/O resources and a CPU as described in the section on
connection diagrams
.
3.1.2 Extension
The basic module is an electronic card for connection as described in the section on
connection diagrams
.
3.1.3 Keyboards
Two types of
keyboard
are available:
• TS-P: Panel
keyboard
(32×74)
•
TS-W:
Wall-mounted keyboard
3.1.4 CF (Control Fan) Modules
Used to connect fans with
Energy 400 low voltage outputs
.
3.1.5 Copy Card
Can be used to upload and download the
Energy 400
parameter map.
3.1.6 Serial Interface (EWTK)
A device which permits the controller to interface with a Personal Computer
It must be connected up as illustrated in the figure
The PC must be connected with the interface module, and the interface module with the device, with no power
on to any of the devices, and in compliance with current safetyregulations . Be careful to avoid electrostatic
shocks, especially on exposed metal parts of the devices; allow electrostatic shocks to discharge into the ground before handling.
3.1.7 Param Manager
If you have an adequate Personal Computer with Windows 95 or a more recent operating system, the
Param Manager
software, an adequate interface module and proper wiring, you can have full control over all
Energy 400 parameters
via
Personal Computer.
The instrument can be programmed easily and quickly using a series of interfaces which permit a logical, guided approach.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
5
4 INSTALLATION
x
Before proceeding with any operation, first make sure that you have connected up the power supply to the
device through an appropriate external current trransformer.
Always follow these rules when connecting boards to one another and to the application:
Never apply
loads
which exceed the limits set forth in these specifications to
outputs
;
Always comply with
connection diagrams
when connecting up
loads
;
To prevent electrical couplings, always wire low voltage
loads
separately from high voltage
loads
;
4.1 Connection diagrams
Basic module
Detail of connectors
Analogue inputs
Instrument configuration is determined by the values of the
parameters
associated with inputs and
outputs
.
4.2 Configuration of analogue inputs
There are 6
analogue inputs
:
•
4 NTC transducers,
• 2 configurable NTC/4-20mA transducers.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
6
Analogue inputs: resolution and precision
Analogue inputs: configuration table
The following devices shall henceforth be referred to by the codes ST1….ST4:
ST1 – Temperature control probe: inflowing water or air, reading
range
: -30 ° C ÷ 90 ° C;
ST2 – Configurable probe, reading
range
: -30
°
C
÷
90
°
C;
ST3 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mA
ST4 — Configurable probe, reading
range
: -30
°
C
÷
90
°
C;
ST5 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mA
ST6 — Configurable probe, reading
range
: -30
°
C
÷
90
°
C;
4
analogue inputs
are available on the
extension
which is not used in this release.
The resolution of NTC
analogue inputs
is one tenth of a Kelvin degree;
They are precise to within 0.8
°
C within the
range
of 0
÷
35
°
C and to within 0.8
°
C
÷
3
°
C in the remainder of the scale.
The 4-20mA input is precise to within 1% FS, with a resolution of one tenth of a Kelvin degree, if the input is configured as a
dynamic set point
, or Kpa*10 if the input is configured as a pressure probe.
ST1-ST6 probes can be configured according to the following table:
Pa.
Description
H11
H12
H13
H14
H15
analogue input
ST1
Configuration of analogue input
ST2
Configuration of analogue input
ST3 analogue input
ST4
Configuration of analogue input
ST5
H16
Configuration of analogue input
ST6
0
Probe absent
Probe absent
Probe absent
Probe absent
Probe absent
Probe absent
1
NTC input inflowing water or air
NTC input outflowing water/air, anti-freeze
NTC input condensation
NTC input condensation
NTC input outflowing water/air
NTC input condensation circuit 2
2
Digital input request for
heating
Digital input request for
cooling
4…20 mA condensation input
Value
3
Digital input request for temperature
4
Differential
NTC input
5
Not permitted control
Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted
4…20 mA input for
dynamic set point
NTC antifreeze for water-water gas reversal machines
NTC
heating
control for water-water water reversal machines
Multifunction al digital input
NTC input for outdoor temperature
Not permitted Not permitted
Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted
4-20mA input condensation
Not permitted Antifreeze input for water-water gas reversal machines
Not permitted
If inputs ST3 and ST6 are defined as 4-20mA inputs under pressure, the scale bottom value of the pressure input is also significant:
Pa H17
= Maximum input value; set the corresponding value to a current of 20 mA
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
7
Digital inputs
Digital inputs: polarity
Digital inputs:
Polarity table
4.3 Configuration of digital inputs
There are 11 voltage-free
digital inputs
, which will henceforth be identified as ID1….ID11.
ST1, ST2, and ST4 may be added to these if they are configured as
digital inputs
(through
parameters Pa H11
,
Pa H12
,
Pa
H14
). 4 more
digital inputs
are available on the
extension
.
The polarity of
digital inputs
is determined by the
parameters
listed below:
ID1, ID2, ID3, ID4 defined by parameter
Pa H18
,
ID5, ID6, ID7, ID8 defined by parameter
Pa H19
ID9, ID10, ID11, ST4 (if configured as digital) defined by parameter
Pa H20
ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15 on
extension
defined by parameter Pa N01
Pa H18
Pa H19
ID1
ID5
ID2
ID6
ID3
ID7
Pa H20
ID9
ID12
ID10
ID13
ID11
ID14
Pa H21
0
1
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
13
14
15
10
11
12
8
9
6
7
4
5
2
3
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
Open
ID4
ID8
ST4
ID15
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Example: A value of “10” for parameter
Pa H18
indicates that
digital inputs
ID1 and ID3 are active when their contacts are closed and
digital inputs
ID2 and ID4 are active when their contacts are open:
Digital inputs:
Configuration
Table
Pa H18
10
ID1
Closed
ID2
Open
ID3
Closed
ID4
Open
If ST1 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter
Pa H21
If ST2 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter Pa H22
Parameter Value Description
0
1
Active if closed
Active if open
All
digital inputs
are configurable and may be given the meanings listed below by setting
parameters Pa H23
through
Pa
H34
and Pa N02 through Pa N05
Parameter Value Description
12
13
14
15
8
9
10
11
16
17
18
19
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
Input disabled
Flow switch
Remote OFF
Remote Heat/Cool
Thermal switch compressor 1
Thermal switch compressor 2
Thermal switch compressor 3
Thermal switch compressor 4
Thermal switch fan circuit 1
Thermal switch fan circuit 2
High pressure circuit 1
High pressure circuit 2
Low pressure circuit 1
Low pressure circuit 2
High pressure compressor 1
High pressure compressor 2
High pressure compressor 3
High pressure compressor 4
End of
End of
defrost defrost
circuit 1
circuit 2
In the case of multiple inputs configured with the same value, the function associated with the input will carry out a
Logical OR among the inputs.
Outputs
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
8
Configuration table
Polarity Table
Configuration of fan outputs
4.4 Configuration of outputs
There are two basic types of
outputs
:
power outputs
, and
low voltage outputs
.
4.4.1 Power outputs
There are 8
power outputs
, which shall henceforth be referred to as RL1…RL8 (relays).
RL1 — compressor 1, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
RL2 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
RL3 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
RL4 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
RL5 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
RL6 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
RL7 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
RL8 – cumulative alarm, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
There are 2 additional digital
outputs
in the
extension
module:
RL9 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
RL10 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
Configurable
outputs
may be given the following meanings by setting
parameters Pa H35
through
Pa H40
and Pa N06 through Pa N07
7
8
9
10
11
5
6
3
4
1
2
Value
0
Description
Disabled
Reversal valve circuit 1
Reversal valve circuit 2
Condenser fan circuit 1
Condenser fan circuit 2
Electrical heater 1
Electrical heater 2
Pump
Evaporator fan
Power Step
Power Step
Power Step
2
3
4
Polarity of RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5,RL8 may be selected using
Pa H41
—
Pa H45
Parameter Value Description
0
1
Relay closed if output active
Relay open if output not active
If multiple
outputs
are configured with the same resource, the
outputs
will be activated in parallel.
4.4.2 Low voltage outputs
There are a total of 4
low voltage outputs
available: 2 phase cut
outputs
and 2 4-20 mA
outputs
:
TK1 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 1.
TK2 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 2.
AN1 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 1
AN2 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 2
Outputs
AN1 and AN2, though their connections are physically separate, are alternatives to
outputs
TK1 and TK2 which are selected by
parameters Pa H45
and
Pa H46
Fan config. parameter Index
Fan 1 output
Fan 2 output
H45
H46
Value 0
Fan 1 output in phase cut
Fan 2 output in phase cut
Value 1
Fan 1 output in 4-20 mA
Fan 2 output in 4-20 mA
4.4.3 Serial outputs
There are 2 asynchronous serials on the control:
• channel for serial communication with a personal computer through a Microtech interface module
• channel for serial communication with a standard Microtech
keyboard
. Power supply 12 VDC (2400,e,8,1).
Unit of measurement: selection
4.5 Physical quantities and units of measurement
Parameter
Pa H64
may be used to set temperature
display
in either degrees °C or degrees °F:
Pa H64
0
1
Unit of measurement
Degrees °C
Degrees °F
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
9
Keyboard
5 USER INTERFACE
x
The interface on the front panel of the instrument can be used to carry out all the operations connected to the use of the instrument, and in particular to:
•
Set operating mode
• Respond to alarm situations
•
Check the state of resources
Front panel of the instrument
Mode
The instrument can function without the aid of a
keyboard
5.1 Keys
Selects operating mode:
If the
heating
mode is enabled, each time the key is pressed the following sequence occurs:
Stand-by
à
cooling
à
heating
à
stand-by
if
heating
mode is not enabled:
Stand-by
à
cooling
à
stand-by
In menu mode, this key acts as a
SCROLL UP
or UP key (increasing value).
Resets
alarms
, and turns the instrument on and off.
Press once to
reset
all manually
reset alarms
not currently active; all the
alarm events per hour
will also be
reset
even if the
alarms
are not active.
Hold down the key for 2 seconds to turn the instrument from on to off or vice versa. When it is off, only the decimal point remains on the
display
. In menu mode this key acts as a
SCROLL DOWN
or DOWN key (decreasing value).
Pressing the “mode” and “on-off”
keys
at the same time:
If you press both
keys
at the same time and then release within 2 seconds, you will move one level deeper in the
display
menu.
If you press both
keys
for more than 2 seconds you will move one level up.
If you are currently viewing the lowest level in the menu and you press both
keys
and release within 2 seconds, you will go up one level.
5.2 Display
The device can communicate information of all kinds on its status, configuration, and
alarms
through a
display
and a number of leds on its front panel.
5.2.1 Display
Normal
display
shows:
• regulation temperature in tenths of degrees celsius or fahrenheit
• the alarm code, if at least one alarm is active. If multiple
alarms
are active, the one with greater priority will be displayed, according to the Table of
Alarms
.
• If temperature control is not analogue and depends on the status of a digital input (ST1 or ST2 configured as
digital inputs
), the “On” or “Off” label will be displayed, depending on whenther temperature control is active or not.
• When in menu mode, the
display
depends on the current position; labels and codes are used to help the user identify the current function.
5.2.2 Led
Led
1 compressore 1.
ON if compressor 1 is active
• OFF if compressor 1 if off
•
Rapid
BLINK
if
safety timing
is in progress
• Slow
BLINK
if compressor is currently set to
defrost
Power step
2
led
ON if
power step
2 is active
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
10
•
OFF if
power step
2 is not active
• Rapid
BLINK
if
safety timing
is in progress
•
Slow
BLINK
if step 2 is currently defrosting
Remote keyboard
Led
step 3 di potenza
ON se lo step 3 di potenza è attivo
• OFF se lo step 3 di potenza non è attivo
•
BLINK
veloce se sono in corso temporizzazioni di sicurezza
•
BLINK
lento se step 3 in sbrinamento
Power step
4
led
•
ON if
power step
4 is active
• OFF if
power step
4 is not active
•
Rapid
BLINK
if
safety timing
is in progress
• Slow
BLINK
if step 4 is defrosting
Electrical heater/boiler
led
•
ON if at least one internal anti-freeze electrical heater or boiler is enabled
• OFF if both are off
Heating Led
•
ON if the device is in
heating
mode.
Cooling Led
• ON if the controller is in
cooling
mode
If neither the
HEATING led
nor the
COOLING led
are in, the controller is in
STAND-BY
mode.
When it is off, only the decimal point appears on the
display
.
5.3 Wall-mounted keyboard
The
remote keyboard
a on the
display
is an exact copy of the information displayed on the instrument, with the same leds;
Remote keyboard
It performs exactly the same
functions
as those described in the
display
section.
The only difference is in use of the UP and DOWN
keys
(to increase and decrease value), which are separate from the
MODE and ON/OFF
keys
.
5.4 Programming parameters – Menu levels
Device
parameters
may be modified using a Personal Computer (with the required software, interface key and cables), or using the
keyboard
;
If using the
keyboard
, access to
parameters
is arranged in a hierarchy of levels which may be accessed by pressing the
“mode and “on-off”
keys
at the same time (as described above).
Each menu level is identified by a mnemonic code which appears on the
display
.
The structure is set up as shown in the diagram below:
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
11
Menu structure
Control probe
Current alarm
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
Set point:
Analogue Inp.:
Alarms:
Digital input:
Parameters:
Password:
Op. hours:
Label cooling set:
Label heating set:
Input code.: —
Current alarms Code:
Input code: —
Configuration par.:
Compressor par.:
Fan control par.:
Alarms par.:
Pump par.:
Antifreeze par.:
Defrost par.:
Password value
Comp. hours:
Pump hours:
—
Value cooling set
Value heating set
Val. analogue input
Status of digital input
Par. index
Par. index
Par. index
Par. index
Par. index
Par. index
Par. index
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Number of hours par.
Number of hours par.
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
13
5.5 Visibility of parameters and submenus
With a personal computer, interface key, suitable cables and the “
Param Manager
” software, it is possible to restrict the visibility and modification of
parameters
and entire submenus.
A “visibility value” may be assigned to each parameter, as described below:
Value
0003
0258
0770
0768
Meaning
Parameter or label visible at all times
Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password =
Pa
H46
)
Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password =
Pa
H46
). Parameter cannot be modified.
Parameter visible from PC only.
Some visibility settings are factory set.
For more information, please refer to the “
Param Manager
” instructions.
5.5.1 Copy Card
The
copy card
can store the whole map of
Energy 400 parameters
;
To download the map present in the
copy card
, proceed as follows:
1. Connect the key to the appropriate
Energy 400
output (refer to
connection diagrams
) while the device is off.
2. Turn on the
Energy 400
: the
parameters
map in the
copy card
will be copied to the
Energy 400
.
To store the
Energy 400 parameters
map in memory, proceed as follows:
1. Connect the
copy card
to the appropriate
Energy 400
output (refer to
connection diagrams
) while the device is on.
2. From the
keyboard
, access the “password” submenu (refer to
menu structure
) and set the value contained in parameter
Pa H46
: The instrument’s map will be downloaded to the
copy card
.
3. Disconnect the
copy card
when finished.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
14
Power step
6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
x
In this section we will look at how to configure
parameters
for various
loads
on the basis of the type of
installation
to be controlled.
6.1 Compressors
Energy 400
can control systems consisting of up to two
cooling
circuits with 1 to 4
compressors
.
If there is a capacity step, it will be considered as a compressor.
Each compressor is piloted by a device relay (
power outputs
) (each capacity step requires an additional output).
The first compressor must be connected to output RL1; the remaining
outputs
(RL2…RL7) (RL9…RL10 on
extension
) may be assigned at will, setting the value of the
parameters Pa H35
…. PaH40 (Pa N06 … Pa N07 if there is no
extension
).
The
compressors
will be turned on or off depending on the temperatures detected and the
temperature control functions
that have been set (refer to the section on Compressor controls – Regulation algorithml )
6.2 Compressor configuration
The turning on of an additional compressor (or capacity step) will henceforth be referred to as a
Power step
(power level).
The following configurations are available for
compressors
without capacity steps:
Simple compressors
(
1
Pa
H05
=1)
1 (
Pa H06
=1)
RL1=comp. 1 circ.1
Number of
compressors
per circuit
2 (
Pa H06
=2)
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1
Step2 = comp 2 circ.1
3 (
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1
Step2 = comp 2 circ.1
Pa H06
=3)
Step3 = comp 3 circ.1
4 (
Pa H06
=4)
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1
Step2 = comp 2 circ.1
Step3 = comp 3 circ.1
Step4 = comp 4 circ.1
Configuration error Configuration error
2
(
Pa
H05
=2)
RL1=Comp. 1 circ.1
Step3 = comp. 1 circ.2
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1
Step2 = comp 2 circ.1
Step3 = comp 1 circ.2
Step4 = comp 2 circ.2
with 1 capacity step
The following configurations are available for
compressors
with 1 capacity step (
Pa H07
=1):
(
1
Pa
H05
=1)
Number of
compressors
per circuit
1 (
Pa H06
=1) 2 (
Pa H06
=2)
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1
Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1
Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1
Step3 = comp.2 circ.1
Step4 = cap. step1 Comp.2 circ.1
2
(
Pa
H05
=2)
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1
Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1
Step3 = comp.1 circ.2
Step4 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.2
Configuration error
with 2 or 3 capacity steps
The following configurations are available for
compressors
with 2 or 3 capacity steps (
Pa H07
=2 or
Pa H07
=3):
(
1
Pa
H05
=1)
Number of
compressors
per circuit
1 (
Pa H06
=1 and
Pa H07
=2) 2 (
Pa H06
=2 and
Pa H07
=3)
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1
Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1
Step4 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1
Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1
Step3 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1
Step4 = cap. step3 comp.1 circ.1
2
(
pa
H05
=2)
Configuration error Configuration error
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
15
Compressors: coming on on the basis of hours of operation and circuit saturation
Compressors: coming on on the basis of hours of operation and circuit balancing
6.2.1 Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences
Depending on the temperature conditions detected by the probes, the
temperature control functions
of the “
Energy 400
” may request turning on and off of
compressors
/capacity steps (
power step
s).
The sequence in which
compressors
/capacity steps (steps) are turned on and off may be determined by adjusting the values of
parameters Pa H08
and
Pa H09
as described below:
Par Description
Pa H08 Power step
on sequence
Parameter value
0
Depends on number of hours of
1
Unvaried on sequence operation
Circuit saturation Circuit balancing
Pa H09
Circuit balacing
When on sequences depend on the number of hours of operation, of 2 available
compressors
, the one which has been operated for less hours will come on first, and the one which has been operated for more hours will always go off first. In an unvaried on sequence, the compressor with the lower number will always come on first (compressor 1 before compressor 2) and the compressor with the higher number will always go off first.
The circuit balancing parameter is significant only if there are 2 circuits and 2 steps per circuit. If we select H09=0, all
power step
s in one circuit will come on before those in the other circuit. If H09=1 (balancing),
power step
s will come on in such a way that both circuits are delivering the same power, or the difference is no more than one step.
Let us take a closer look at the various combinations:
Pa H08
=0
Pa H09
=0
CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER
CIRCUIT:
The compressor with the least hours of operation comes on first, then the capacity step for the same circuit, the compressor on the other circuit, and, lastly, its capacity step.
When turning off, the capacity step of the compressor with the most hours of operation goes off first, then the corresponding compressor, then the other capacity step and finally the other compressor.
CASE OF 2
COMPRESSORS
PER CIRCUIT:
If all
compressors
are off to start with, the circuit which has the lower
average number of hours
for all its
compressors
will come on first. In this circuit the compressor with the least hours of operation will come on first, followed by the other compressor in the same circuit: thus the circuit is saturated. The next step is chosen between the two
compressors
in the other circuit with fewer hours.
Example:
Supposing the system has been configured as follows:
RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1
Step2 = capacity step compressor 2
Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2
Step4 = capacity step compressor 2
If
hours comp.1 > hours comp.2
they will come on in this order
Step3à Step4à
à
and go off in this order
Step2à
à
Step4à
Step2
Step3
Example:
Supposing the system has been configured as follows:
RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1
Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1
Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2
Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2
If
hours comp.1 > hours comp.2
hours comp.4 > hours comp.3
(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 + hours comp.3)/2
they will come on in this order
Step3à Step4à Step2à RL1
and go off in this order
à
Step2à Step4à Step3
Pa H08
=0 and
Pa H09
=1
CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER
CIRCUIT:
The compressor with the least hours of operation comes on first, followed by the compressor in the other circuit, the capacity step of the first circuit to come on, and, lastly, the other capacity step. When going off, the capacity step of the compressor with the most hours goes off first, followed by the capacity step of the other compressor, the compressor with the most hours and, lastly, the remaining compressor.
CASE OF 2
COMPRESSORS
PER CIRCUIT
If all
compressors
are off to start with, the circuit with the lower
average number of hours
for its
compressors
will come on first. The average is calculated as the ratio between the total number of hours of the
compressors
available and the number of
compressors
in the circuit. In this circuit, the compressor with the least hours will come on first, then the compressor in the other circuit with the least hours, the other compressor in the first circuit and, lastly, the remaining compressor.
Example:
Supposing the system has been configured as follows:
RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1
Step2 = capacity step compressor 2
Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2
Step4 = capacity step compressor 2
if
hours comp.1 > hours comp.2
they will come on in this order
Step3à RL1à
à
and go off in this order
Step2à
à
RL1à
Step2
Step3
Example:
Supposing the system has been configured as follows
RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1
Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1
Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2
Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2
if
hours comp.1 > hours comp.2
hours comp.4 > hours comp.3
(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 + hours comp.3)/2
they will come on in this order
Step3à Step2à Step4à RL1
and go off in this order
à
Step4à Step2à Step3
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
16
Compressors: unvaried on sequence with circuit saturation
Compressors: unvaried on sequence with circuit balancing
Safety timing
Off-on timing
On-on timing
Pa H08
=1 and
Pa H09
=0
CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT
The compressor con with the lower number comes on first, then its capacity step, then the compressor in the other circuit and, lastly, its capacity step. The capacity step for the compressor with the highest number is the first to go off, followed by the capacity step of the other compressor, and finally the compressor.
CASE OF 2
COMPRESSORS
PER CIRCUIT
Exactly the same as the first case.
Example:
Supposing the system has been configured as follows:
RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1
Step2 = capacity step compressor 2
Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2
Step4 = capacity step compressor 2
they will come on in this order
RL1à Step2à Step3à
and go off in this order
Step4
Step4à Step3à Step2à RL1
Pa H08
=1 e
Pa H09
=1
CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT
The compressor with the lowest number comes on first, then the compressor in the other circuit, the capacity step of the first compressor and then the capacity step of the second compressor. They go off in reverse order.
CASE OF 2
COMPRESSORS
PER CIRCUIT
Exactly the same as the first case.
Example:
Supposing the system has been configured as follows:
RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1
Step2 = capacity step compressor 2
Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2
Step4 = capacity step compressor 2
they will come on in this order
RL1à Step3à Step2à
and go off in this order
Step4
Step4à Step2à Step3à RL1
In the unvaried sequence, if the compressor with the lower number is unavailable, the compressor with the higher number comes on.
If the compressor comes available and the amount of power required is equal to the amount of power being delivered, the machine will continue to function in its current state: it will not turn off a compressor with a higher number to turn on a compressor with a lower number.
A compressor is unavailable when it is shut down due to an alarm or is currently counting
safety timing
.
6.2.2 Compressor timing
The turning on and off of
compressors
must comply with safety times which may be set by the user using the
parameters
specified below:
There is a safety interval between the time a compressor goes off and the time the same compressor comes back on
(compressor on…off safety time, controlled by parameter
Pa C01
);
This interval of time must elapse when the “
Energy 400
” is turned on.
There is a safety interval between the time a compressor is turned on and the time it is turned on again (compressor on…on safety time, controlled by parameter
Pa C02
) .
Off-on and on-on diagram for 1 compressor
Compressor
ON
OFF
OFF – ON safety time
Pa C01
Seconds*10
ON – ON safety time
Pa C02
On-on off-off times for 2 comp.
If the machine has multiple
power step
s, there are intervals of time which must pass between turning on of 2
compressors
(
Pa C06
) and turning off of 2
compressors
(
Pa C07
). An amount of time determined by parameter
Pa C08
(capacity step on delay) must elapse between the turning on of one compressor or capacity step and the turning on of any other
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
17
on-on and off-off diagram 2 comp
compressor or capacity step on the machine. The greatest of the currently active safety times must be applied to each compressor.
The off time interval between
compressors
is not applied in the event of a compressor shutdown alarm, in which case they stop immediately.
Comp.1
ON
OFF
Comp.2
ON
OFF
Seconds
Interval between turning on compressors Pa C05
Interval between turning off compressors Pa C07
Seconds
6.3 Condensation fan
“
Energy 400
” may be connected with two types of fan piloting unit:
• Triak
•
4-20 mA
6.3.1 Fan configuration
First of all, correctly configure the type of analogue output (
low voltage outputs
) to which the fan control module(s) are connected; the relevant
parameters
are
Pa H45
for the first circuit and
Pa H46
for the second circuit, as shown in the table below:
Parameter value
0
1
Circuit 1 –
Pa H45
TK output enabled for phase
Circuit 2 –
Pa H46
TK output enabled for phase cut cut
Enable 4-20 mA output AN1 Enable 4-20 mA output AN2
Pick-up
Phase shift
Impulse duration
Fan configuration: selection of output type
If the output is configured as a proportional triac, the
parameters PICK-UP
,
PHASE SHIFT
, and
IMPULSE DURATION
are also significant.
Every time the external fan is started up, power is supplied to the exchanger fan at maximum voltage, and the fan operates at maximum speed, for an amount of time equal to
Pa F02
seconds; after this time the fan operates at the speed set by the regulator.
Pa F02
= Fan
pick-up
time (seconds)
Determines a delay during which it is possible to compensate the different electrical characteristics of the fan drive motors:
Pa F03
= duration of fan
phase shift
expressed as a percentage.
Determines the duration of the TK output piloting impulse in microseconds*10
Pa F04
= triak piloting
impulse duration
6.3.2 Fan control configuration
The fan control may be configured to supply a proportionate output (0-100%) or to function as “ON OFF” by setting the value of the parameter
Pa F01
:
Pa F01
=
Selection
of control output type
Pa F01
= 0 proportionate fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on
parameters
)
Pa F01
= 1
Pa F01
= 2 fan “on-off” output; in this mode the control performs the same calculations as in proportionate output, but if the outcome is greater than 0, the control output will be 100.
on-off operation as called by compressor. In this mode output is 0 if no compressor is on in the circuit, or 100% if at least one compressor in the circuit is on
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
18
Reversing valve
If some of the relays are configured as
condensation fan outputs
(
Pa H35
—
Pa H40
and Pa N06- Pa N07=3 or 4), they will be on if the control output for each fan is greater than 0; otherwise, they will be off.
6.4 Reversing valves
The
reversing valve
is used only when operating in “heat pump” mode.
“
Energy 400
” can control up to 2
reversing valves
in a dual circuit system.
The
reversing valve
in circuit 1 is active only if:
• a relay (power output) is configured as
reversing valve
for circuit 1 (
Pa H35
—
Pa H40
or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 1).
The
reversing valve
in circuit 2 is active only if:
• a relay (power output) is configured as
reversing valve
for circuit 2 (
Pa H35
—
Pa H40
or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 2)
• there are 2 circuits
Both of them will be active only if the heat pump is in operation (Pa H10=1 )
6.5 Hydraulic pump
The
hydraulic pump
is active only if at least one relay (power output) is configured as pump output (
Pa H35
—
Pa H40
or Pa
N06-Pa N07= 7 ) .
The pump may be configured to function independently of the compressor or whenever called up using parameter
Pa P01
:
Pa P01
= Pump operating mode
0=continuous operation
1=operation when called up by regulation algorithm with a flow switch alarm (table of
alarms
) which is active with automatic
reset
, the pump will be on even if the compressis off.
configuration
6.6 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters
“
Energy 400
” can control up to 2
anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters
.
The electrical heater output is active only if the relays (
power outputs
) are configured as electrical heaters 1 or 2 (
Pa H35
—
Pa H40
or Pa N06-Pa N07= 5 or 6) .
If configured in this way, the
outputs
will command the electrical heater to come on or go off, depending on the
parameters
of configuration of electrical heaters
Pa R01
…
Pa R06
, as described below:
Parameter Description
Pa R01
Pa R02
Pa R03
Pa R06
Defrost
configuration
Cooling
mode configuration
Heating
mode configuration
OFF or
STAND-BY
configuration
0
comes on only when requested by
Value
1
always on during
defrost
control off during
cooling
off during
heating
off when OFF or on
STAND-BY
on during
cooling
(depending on antifreeze electrical heater control) on during
heating
(depending on antifreeze electrical heater control)
Electrical heaters on when OFF or on
STAND-BY
probe configuration
Parameters
r04 and r05 determine which probe the electrical heaters will control.
Each of the two electrical heaters may be set to any one of probes ST1, ST2 or ST5.
If the is absent or configured as a digital input, the electrical heaters will always be off.
Pa r04
configuration probe set to electrical heater 1
Pa r05
configuration probe set to electrical heater 2
2
3
0
1
Value
Parameters
Description
Electrical heater off
Set to ST1
Set to ST2
Set to ST5
6.7 Internal fan
The fan output will be active only if one relay is configured as evaporator fan output.
The output is ON if at least one compressor is ON; otherwise it is off. During
defrost
the output is always off.
6.8 Condensation-Defrost probes
“
Energy 400
” can control defrosting of one or more circuits depending on
system configuration
.
Defrost
is enabled if:
• stated by the “Enable
defrost
” parameter (
Pa d01
= 1)
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
19
• the condensation probe for circuit 1 is present (connected to analogue input ST3) and the relative parameter
Pa H13
= 1 (in the case of an NTC probe) or
Pa H13
= 2 (in the case of a 4-20mA probe) and ST4 = 1
• the
reversing valve
is present
In the case of a dual circuit system,
defrost
may be separate or combined (this will be the case of a system with a single condenser) depending on the setting of the parameter
Pa F22
: condensation type
Pa F22
: condensation type
0
Separate condensers
1
Combined condensation
separate or combined condensation probe configuration
Defrost end
and start depends on the values of the condensation probes, which may be configured as follows:
Let SCC1 be the condensation probe of circuit 1; it may be connected to analogue input ST3 or ST4; depending on the type of probe, the configuration will be as shown in the table below:
Probe type
SCC1 NTC type
SCC1 4-20mA type
Probe connected to
ST3
Pa H13
Pa H13
= 1
= 2
The following table applies to a dual circuit system:
Probe connection
Probe connected to
ST4
Pa H14
= 1
—
Defrost
circuit 1
Defrost
circuit 2
1 circuit 2 circuits, separate
defrost
SCC1
—
SCC1
ST6
(*) If A and B are control probes, MIN(A;B) represents the smaller of A and B, if A and B are declared present.
It will be value A if B is not declared present.
It is impossible for A not to be declared present.
2 circuits, combined
defrost
(*)
MIN(SCC1;ST6)
MIN(SCC1;ST6)
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
20
Operating modes
Cooling
Heating
Stand-by
Device off
Operating modes: configuration table
7 TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
x
Once ”
Energy 400
” has been configured,
loads
may be controlled on the basis of temperature and pressure conditions detected by probes and
temperature control functions
which may be defined using the appropriate
parameters
.
There are 4 possible
operating modes
:
•
cooling
•
heating
•
stand-by
• off
Cooling
: this is the “summer” operating mode; the machine is configured for
cooling
.
Heating
: this is the “winter” operating mode; the machine is configured for
heating
.
Stand-by
: the machine does not govern any temperature control function; it continues to signal
alarms
Off: machine is turned off.
The operating mode is determined by settings entered on the
keyboard
and by the following
Parameters
:
Configuration parameter ST1 (Pa H11) ( refer to
Analogue inputs: configuration table
)
Configuration parameter ST2 (Pa H12) ( refer to
Analogue inputs: configuration table
)
Operating mode
selection
parameter (Pa H49)
Heat pump parameter (Pa H10 )
Operating mode
selection
parameter (Pa H49)
0=
Selection
from
keyboard
1=
Selection
from digital input (refer to
digital inputs
)
Heat pump parameter (Pa H10)
0 = Heat pump not present
1 = Heat pump present
Combinations of these
parameters
will generate the following rules:
Operating mode
Mode
selection
from
keyboard
Mode
selection
from digital input.
If input ST1 is on, operating mode is
heating
; if not,
stand-by
If input ST2 is on, operating mode is
cooling
; if not,
stand-by
If input ST1 is on, operating mode is
heating
; if input ST2 is on, operating mode is
cooling
; if ST1 and ST2 are both on, there is a control error; if neither is on, operating mode is
stand-by
Any
Any
Mode
selection
parameter
Pa H49
0
1
Any
Configuration parameter ST1
Pa H11
Other than 2
Other than 2
2
Other than 2
2
2
2
Configuration parameter ST2
Pa H12
Other than 2
Other than 2
Other than 2
7.1 Setting set points
Unless the machine is configured as a motor condenser,
loads
will come on and go off dynamically depending on the
temperature control functions
set, the temperature/pressure values detected by the probes, and the
set point
s that have been set:
There are two
set point
values:
Cooling Set point
: this is the
set point
used as a reference when the device is in
cooling
mode
Heating Set point
: this is the
set point
used as a reference when the device is in
heating
mode
The
set point
s may be modified from the
keyboard
by accessing the “SET” submenu (refer to
menu structure
).
Their values must fall within a
range
determined by
parameters Pa H02
–
Pa H01
(
Heating
) and
Pa H04
–
Pa H03
(
Cooling
).
7.2 Dynamic Set point
The regulation algorithm may be used to modify the
set point
automatically on the basis of outdoor conditions.
This modification is achieved by adding a positive or negative offset value to the
set point
, depending on:
• 4-20 mA analogue input (proportionate to a signal set by the user) or
• temperature of outdoor probe
This function has two purposes: to save energy, or to operate the machine under particularly harsh outdoor temperature conditions.
The
dynamic set point
is active if:
• Activation parameter
Pa H50
= 1
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
21
Control parameters
Modification depending on current input with positive offset
•
Probe ST3 (
analogue inputs
) is configured as a
dynamic set point
input (
Pa H13
= 3) or probe ST4 (
analogue inputs
) is configured as an outdoor probe (
Pa H14
= 3)
Parameters
for control of the
dynamic set point
:
•
Pa H51
= max. offset during
cooling
.
•
Pa H52
= max. offset during
heating
•
Pa H53
= Outdoor temperature
set point
during
cooling
•
Pa H54
= Outdoor temperature
set point
during
heating
•
Pa H55
= Delta of
cooling
temperature
•
Pa H56
= Delta of
heating
temperature
The interaction of these
parameters
is illustrated in the graphs below:
Positive Offset (H32>0 or H33>0)
Offset
Set point
Max offset
Modification depending on current input with negative offset
Modification depending on outdoor temperature with positive offset
4 mA
Negative Offset (H32<0 or H33<0)
20 mA Current
Max offset
4 mA 20 mA
Current
Positive Offset
Outdoor temp. set point (H53 or
H54)
Delta <0
Temp.
Delta >0
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
22
Modification depending on outdoor temperature with negative offset
Offset Negativo
Outdoor temp. set point. (H53 or
H54)
Delta <0
Delta >0
Temp.
Regulation algorithm in cool mode
7.3 Load control
We will now look at how to set
parameters
for
load control
on the basis of temperature/pressure conditions detected by probes.
7.3.1 Compressor control – regulation algorithm
The regulation algorithm calculates the load to be supplied through the
compressors
for both
heating
and
cooling
.
REGULATION ALGORITHM IN COOL MODE
If probe ST2 (
analogue inputs
) is not configured as a digital input for requests for
cooling
(
Pa H11
=2) or probe
ST1(
analogue inputs
) as a digital input for regulation algorithm requests (
Pa H12
=3), compressor management will depend on ambient temperature and a
SET POINT
.
ST1 = temperature of inflowing water or inlet air
SET COOL=
cooling set point
set from
keyboard
.
Pa C03
=
hysteresis
of
cooling
thermostat
Pa C05
= delta of
power step
intervention
Cooling diagram
Power
4 th
step
3 rd
step
2 nd
step
1 st
step
Pa C03
Pa C05
Pa C03
Pa C05
Pa C03
Pa C05
Pa C03
ST1
Regulation algorithm in heat mode
If
Pa H01
1 = 3, the
power step
requested will depend on the status of input ST1 (
analogue inputs
).
If
Pa H01
2 = 2, the
power step
requested will depend on the status of input ST2 (
analogue inputs
).
If probe ST5 (
analogue inputs
) is configured as a second step request (
Pa H15
=2), the second step (
power step
) will be requested on the basis of this input. This function will be active only if either
Pa H11
=3 or
Pa H12
=2.
Only motor condensers may be controlled, up to 2 steps only.
REGULATION ALGORITHM IN HEAT MODE
If probe ST1(
analogue inputs
) is not configured as a digital input for requests for heat (
Pa H05
=2) or digital input for requests for regulation algorithm (
Pa H05
=3), compressor management will depend on
• temperature ST3 (
analogue inputs
), if configuration parameter ST3 = 5 (for water/water manual reversal machines)
• otherwise, temperature ST1(
analogue inputs
)
• a
HEATING set point
which may be set from the
keyboard
ST1/ST3 =Temperature of inflowing water or inlet air
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
23
HEATING
SET =
Heating set point
that has been set
Pa C04
=
Heating
thermostat
hysteresis
Pa C05
= Delta of step intervention
Heating diagram
Power
4 th
step
3 rd
step
2 nd
step
1 st
step
Pa C03
Pa C03
Pa C03
Pa C03
ST1/ST3
Differential temperature control
Cool mode
Pa C05 Pa C05
If
Pa H11
= 2-3, the
compressors
will be turned off and on depending on the status of input ST1.
If probe ST5 (
analogue inputs
) is configured as a second step request (
Pa H15
=2), the second step (
power step
) will be requested depending on this input. This function will be active only if
Pa H11
=2,3 or
Pa H12
=2.
DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL
This function may be used to control temperature according to both ST1(
analogue inputs
) and ST4 (
analogue inputs
). The function will be active
• if ST1 is configured as differential NTC input (
Pa H11
= 4)
• if ST4 is configured as outdoor temperature input (
Pa H14
= 3)
In this case, the controller will not control on the basis of ST1, but on the basis of the difference between ST1-ST4; if configuration parameter ST3 is equal to 5 (for water/water machines with manual reversal) in
heating
mode the controller will always control on the basis of ST3.
Differential temperature control
can be used, for instance, to maintain a constant difference in temperature between the outdoor environment and a liquid being heated or cooled.
A compressor will always be off if:
• It is not associated with a relay (power output)
•
The compressor has been shut down (refer to table of
alarms
)
•
Safety timing
is in progress
•
The time lapse between pump on and compressor on is in progress (
safety timing
)
• Preventilation is in progress in
cooling
mode
•
Energy 400
is in
stand-by
or off mode
• The parameter for configuration of probe ST1
Pa H11
= 0 (probe absent)
7.3.2 Condensation fan control
Condensation control is dependent on the condensation temperature or pressure for the circuit.
Fan control will be on if:
• at least one probe per circuit is configured as a condensation probe (pressure or temperature); if not, the fan for the circuit will come ON and go OFF in response to the circuit
compressors
.
Fan control may be independent of the compressor, or it may be carried out in response to requests from
compressors
;
Operating mode is determined by parameter
Pa F05
:
Value
Pa F05
: fan output mode
0
if all
compressors
in the circuit are off, the fan is off
1
condensation control is independent of the compressor
The
cut-off
is bypassed for an amount of time equal to
Pa F12
after the compressor is turned on. If the control requests
cut-off
during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.
If parameter
Pa F05
is set to 1, condensation control will be dependent on condensation temperature or pressure, depending on how the following
parameters
are set:
CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL
IN COOL MODE
Pa F06
= Minimum fan speed in COOL mode;
Pa F07
= Maximum silent fan speed in COOL mode
Pa F08
= Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure
set point
in COOL mode
Pa F09
= Fan prop. band in COOL mode
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
24
Fan control in cool mode: diagram
Pa F10
= Fan
cut-off
delta
Pa F11
=
Cut-off hysteresis
.
Pa F13
= Maximum fan speed in COOL mode
Pa F14
= Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure
set point
in COOL mode
An example of interaction of these
parameters
is shown in the figure below:
Fan control in cool mode
Heat mode
Fan control in heat mode: diagram
In
cooling
mode only, if
Pa F05
= 0 (if the compressor is turned off the fan is off), parameter
Pa F21
(preventilation time for outdoor fan) is active.
Before turning on the
compressors
in the circuit the fan must be turned on for an amount of time equal to Pa F25; fan speed is proportionate to condensation temperature, but if the control requests
cut-off
during this time period the fan will run at the minimum speed setting.
This parameter prevents the compressor from starting up with a condensation temperature that is too high.
CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL
IN HEAT MODE
Pa F15
= Minimum fan speed in HEAT mode;
Pa F16
= Maximum silent fan speed in HEAT mode;
Pa F17
= Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure
set point
in HEAT mode;
Pa F18
= Fan prop. band in HEAT mode;
Pa F10
= Fan
cut-off
delta;
Pa F11
=
Cut-off hysteresis
;
Pa F19
= Maximum fan speed in HEAT mode;
Pa F20
= Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure
set point
in HEAT mode.
An example of interaction of these
parameters
is shown in the figure below:
Fan control in heat mode
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
25
If circuit is in
defrost
mode, the fan is OFF.
The
cut-off
is bypassed for an amount of time equal to
Pa F12
after the compressor is turned on.
If the control requests
cut-off
during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.
The fan will always be off if:
there is an alarm indicating that a
condensation fan
has shut down (refer to table of
alarms
).
Energy 400
is on
stand-by
or off.
diagram
7.3.3 Combined or Separate Condensation
Parameter
Pa F22
may be used to configure a dual circuit machine with a combined condenser.
Pa F22
: condensation type
0
separate condensers
Value
1
combined condenser
If
Pa F22
= 0 the two fans are independent and are controlled by condensation pressure/temperature and the status of the
compressors
in the circuits.
If
Pa F22
= 1 the
outputs
of the 2 fans are in parallel and will be controlled as follows:
by the greater of the condensation probes in the circuits in
cooling
mode
by the smaller of the condensation probes in the circuits in
heating
mode
If one of the 2 circuits does not have a condensation probe a configuration alarm will be generated (refer to table of
alarms
).
7.3.4 Hydraulic pump control
If the pump is configured for continuous operation (
Pa P01
= 0) it will stay on at all times; if not (
Pa P01
= 1) it will be turned on in response to a request from the regulation algorithm.
Interaction between the pump, the
compressors
and the regulation algorithm status is determined by the following
parameters
:
•
Pa P02
: Delay between pump on and
compressors
on.
•
Pa P03
: Delay between regulation algorithm off and pump off.
An example is provided in the diagram below:
Reg. algorithm
ON
OFF
Compressor
ON
Time
Pump
OFF
ON
Time
OFF
Delay between pump on and compressor on
Pa P02
Errore. Il collegamento non è valido.
Time
Delay between compressor off and pump off
Pa P03
During a
defrost
, when the compressor is off, the pump will stay on.
The pump will go off if:
•
There is a pump shut-down alarm, such as a flow switch alarm requiring
manual reset
(refer to table of
alarms
)
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
26
diagram
•
The instrument is on
stand-by
or off (it goes off after the delay determined by
Pa P03
)
7.3.5 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater control
Energy 400
can control 2 anti-freeze electrical heaters;
Each electrical heater is controlled with its own
set point
, which is different for
heating
and
cooling
modes, by means of the following
parameters
:
•
Pa r07
:
set point
of electrical heater 1 in
heating
mode
•
Pa r08
:
set point
of electrical heater 1 in
cooling
mode
•
Pa r13
:
set point
of electrical heater 2 in
heating
mode
•
Pa r14
:
set point
of electrical heater 2 in
cooling
mode
The two
set point
s of the anti-freeze electrical heaters fall within a maximum and a minimum value which the user may set in the form of the following
parameters
:
•
Pa r09
: maximum
set point
for anti-freeze electrical heater
•
Pa r10
: minimum
set point
for anti-freeze electrical heater
When off or on
stand-by
. control is based on the
cooling set point
and the control probe used in
heating
mode.
Parameter
Pa R11
determines
hysteresis
around the
set point
s for the
anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters
.
An example of operation is shown in the diagram below
Diagram illustrating
anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters
control
Parallel electrical heaters
PARALLEL ELECTRICAL HEATERS
Parameter r12 enables the
parallel electrical heaters
function..
Supplementary electrical heaters
This function is useful if the system incorporates 2 hydraulic circuits, each with its own anti-freeze probe, and there is only one anti-freeze electrical heater.
The following conditions must apply for the function to be active:
•
Pa r12
= 1
•
Pa r05
other than 0
•
Pa r06
other than 0.
Control is based on the minimum value detected by the 2 probes, using the
set point
s of electrical heaters 1 (
Pa r07
and
Pa r08
)
If
Pa r15
= 1 the electrical heaters have a dual function, as anti-freeze electrical heaters and
supplementary electrical heaters
. If
Pa r15
= 1 and the system is in
heating
mode., electrical heater 1 will start up under the command of its own control or if ST1 <(SET
HEATING
—
Pa r14
) while heater 2 ) will start up if ST1 <(SET
HEATING
—
Pa r15
) . The control
hysteresis
is
Pa C04
(
heating
control
hysteresis
).
7.3.6 Reversing valve control
The
reversing valves
are turned off if
Energy 400
is off or on
stand-by
;
The valves are ON in
cooling
mode and OFF in
heating
and
defrost
modes.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
27
x
8 FUNCTIONS
8.1 Recording hours of operation
The devices stores the number of hours of operation of the following in
permanent memory
:
•
hydraulic pump
•
compressors
.
It is precise to within one minute.
Hours of operation may be displayed by entering the appropriate menu with the label Ohr (refer to
menu structure
) .
The whole value is displayed if it is less than 999 hours; if it exceeds this value, the hundreds of hours will be shown and the decimal point will appear:
For example, 1234 hours will be displayed as follows:
To set the number of hours to zero, hold the DOWN key (refer to
keys
) down for two seconds while displaying the number of hours of operation.
Power failure
MEMORY
35.48
MEMORY
35
In the event of a power failure, the latest fraction of an hour recorded is set to 0, so that duration is rounded down:
Stopping timer
Setting timer to zero
Defrost: compressor management
8.2 Defrost
The
defrost
function is active in
heating
mode only.
It is used to prevent ice formation on the surface of the external exchanger, which can occur in locations with low temperatures and high humidity and will considerably reduce the machine’s thermodynamic performance, creating a risk of damage to the machine.
Defrost start
and end depends on the condensation probe values (refer to condensation probes–
defrost
) and the settings of the
parameters
listed below:
8.2.1 Defrost start
The
defrost start
s as a result of three
parameters
:
•
Pa d02
: temperature/pressure at which
defrost start
s
•
Pa d03
:
defrost
interval
When the probe detects temperature/pressure values below the value of parameter
Pa d02
it starts the timer, and when the number of minutes determined by parameter
Pa d03
has expired the
defrost
will start;
The timer will stop if:
• Temperature/pressure rises above the value of parameter
Pa d02
•
The compressor is turned off
The timer will be set to zero if:
• a
defrost
cycle is completed
• “
Energy 400
” is turned off
• operating mode is changed (refer to
operating modes
)
• temperature rises above the value of parameter
Pa d04
(
defrost end
temperature/pressure)
During the
defrost
the
compressors
are handled as follows:
• combined
defrost
: all
compressors
are turned on at full power;
• separate
defrost
: all
compressors
in the circuit being defrosted are turned on at full power; there may be a delay between compressor coming on and
Defrost start
imposed by parameter Pa d11
Defrost
will take place only if the following conditions are met: :
• The
safety timing
of
compressors
in the circuit must be 0
•
The delay between circuit defrosts must have expired since the last circuit
defrost
(
Pa d08
)
On a dual circuit machine with combined
defrost
, the following condition must apply:
• in the circuit for which
defrost start
is not requested, compressor safety time = 0 (refer to
safety timing
) so that the two circuits may both start a
defrost
at the same time.
If at the time of
defrost start
the compressor-4-way valve delay time
Pa d06
= 0, the compressor will stay on; if not, the adjustment shown in the diagram below will be carried out.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
28
diagram
Compressors
Reversing valve
Fans
Parameter configuration
8.2.2 Control during defrost
During the
defrost
cycle
loads
are controlled as described below:
compressors
in the circuit for which
defrost
is underway will be turned on to full power, if not already on at full power
The
reversing valve
in the circuit for which
defrost
is underway will behave the way it does in the summer cycle.
When the valve is reversed, a timer begins counting the minimum by-pass time for the circuit involved, equal to “minimum by-pass time during
cooling
” (
Pa A01
).
If the condensation pressure detected falls below (
Pa F23
—
Pa F24
), the fan will be OFF; if it exceeds
Pa F23
, the fan will be
ON. At the end of the drip stage, if parameter
Pa D07
is not 0 the fans will operate at full speed for an amount of time equal to Pa F25 in order to remove water from the batteries as quickly as possible.
If there are no pressure probes on the machine, this will be applied to temperature.
8.2.3 Defrost end
Defrost end
may be determined by temperature/pressure values read by analogue probes ST3, ST2, ST6 (
analogue inputs
) or by digital input (
digital inputs
).
The
configuration parameters
are:
•
Pa d09
: Circuit 1
defrost end
probe
•
Pa d10: Circuit 2
defrost end
probe
Possible values and meanings of these
parameters
are shown below:
Value
Parameters
0
1
2
3
Description
defrost end
in response to digital input
defrost end
in response to ST3
defrost end
in response to ST4
defrost end
in response to ST6
If
Pa d09
=0 (
defrost end
in response to digital input) the digital input configured as “End of
defrost
circuit 1” (
digital inputs
) will be taken into consideration; if Pa d10=0 input “circuit 2
defrost end
”(
digital inputs
) .
In this configuration, as soon as the input becomes active the circuit will have a
defrost end
.
If an analogue input is selected for
defrost end
, the
defrost
will end will pressure/temperature rises above the value of parameter
Pa d04
(
defrost end
temperature/pressure).
If the input is not configured,
defrost
will end only when pressure/temperature rises above the maximum duration set by parameter
Pa d05
Defrost
will always end if duration exceeds the maximum duration set by parameter
Pa D05
.
Drip time
After
defrost end
, if
drip time Pa d07
= 0 the
compressors
will stay on; if not, the adjustment shown in the figure below will take place:
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
29
diagram
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
30
Pa H01
Pa H02
Pa H03
Pa H04
Pa H05
Pa H06
Pa H07
Pa H08
Pa H09
Pa H11
Pa H12
Pa H13
Pa H14
Pa H15
Pa H16
9 PARAMETERS
x
Parameters
make the ”
Energy 400
” a fully configurable device.
They may be modified through:
• instrument
keyboard
• Personal computer (with a suitable connection and “
Param manager
” software)
We will now take a detailed look at all the
parameters
, divided by category.
9.1 Description of Parameters
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
:
Determine the features of the machine.
If one or more of the
parameters
in this category are modified, the cotnroller must be switched off after the modification and switched on again to ensure correct operation.
Maximum
set point
during “
heating
”
Upper limit on
set point
in “
heating
” mode
Minimum
set point
during “
heating
”
Lower limit on
set point
in “
heating
” mode
Maximum
set point
during “
cooling
”
Upper limit on
set point
in “
cooling
” mode
Minimum
set point
during “
cooling
”
Lower limit on
set point
in “
cooling
” mode
) Number of circuits on machine (
∗∗
Number of
cooling
circuits
0= not permitted
1= 1
cooling
circuit
2= 2
cooling
circuits
Number of
compressors
per circuit (∗∗ )
0= no
compressors
1= 1 compressor
2= 2
compressors
3= 3
compressors
4= 4
compressors
Number of capacity steps per compressor (∗∗ )
0= no capacity steps
1= 1 capacity step per compressor
2= 2 capacity steps per compressor
3= 3 capacity steps per compressor
Compressor on sequence
0= depending on hours of operation
1= unvaried on sequence
Compressor
selection
algorithm
0= circuit saturation
1= circuit balancing
ST1 configuration
Used to configure analogue input ST1
0= No probe
1= Inflowing air/water analogue input
2=
Heating
request digital input
3= Regulation algorithm request digital input
4= NTC differential input
ST2 configuration
0= No probe
1= Circuit 1 outflowing water/antifreeze/inlet air analogue input
2=
Cooling
request digital input
ST3 configuration
0= No probe
1= Condensation control analogue input
2= 4…20 mA condensation input
3= 4…20 mA
dynamic set point
input
4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 1
5= Regulation algorithm input in “
heating
” mode for water-water machines with manual reversal
ST4 configuration
0= No probe
1= Condensation control analogue input
2= Multifunctional digital input
3= Outdoor temperature analogue input
ST5 configuration
0= No probe
1= Outflowing water/anti-freeze/inlet air analogue input, circuit 2
ST6 configuration
0= No probe
1= Condensation control analogue input
2= 4…20 mA condensation input
∗ non sono ammesse configurazioni macchina con numero di gradini superiore a 4
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
31
Pa H17
Pa H18
Pa H19
Pa H20
Pa H21
Pa H23
Pa H24
Pa H25
Pa H26
Pa H27
Pa H28
Pa H29
Pa H30
Pa H31
Pa H32
Pa H33
Pa H34
Pa H35
Pa H36
Pa H37
Pa H38
Pa H39
Pa H40
Pa H41
Pa H42
Pa H43
Pa H44
Pa H45
Pa H46
Pa H47
Pa H48
Pa H49
Pa H50
Pa H51
6
7
4
5
2
3
0
1
3= Not permitted
4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 2
Bottom of scale pressure value
Pressure value corresponding to an analogue input value (ST3 or ST6) on the 20mA input (if configured as a current input).
Example
if using a pressure transducer with limits of 0-30.0 bar/4-20mA, set PaH17=300
Polarity of
digital inputs
ID1,ID2,ID3,ID4
Polarity of
digital inputs
ID5,ID6,ID7,ID8
Polarity of
digital inputs
ID9,ID10,ID11,ST4
Polarity of
digital inputs
ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15
These
parameters
may be used to select the polarity which will activate the
digital inputs
to suit them to various operating requirements. Refer to
Digital inputs: polarity
when setting input polarity.
Configuration of digital input ID1
Configuration of digital input ID2
Configuration of digital input ID3
Configuration of digital input ID4
Configuration of digital input ID5
Configuration of digital input ID6
Configuration of digital input ID7
Configuration of digital input ID8
Configuration of digital input ID9
Configuration of digital input ID10
Configuration of digital input ID11
Configuration of digital input ST4 if configured as digital
8
9
10
11
Input disabled
Flow switch
Remote OFF
Remote Heat/Cool
Thermal switch compressor 1
Thermal switch compressor 2
Thermal switch compressor 3
Thermal switch compressor 4
Thermal switch fan circuit 1
Thermal switch fan circuit 2
High pressure circuit 1
High pressure circuit 2
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Low pressure circuit 1
Low pressure circuit 2
High pressure compressor 1
High pressure compressor 2
High pressure compressor 3
High pressure compressor 4
Defrost end
circuit 1
Defrost end
circuit 2
Request for
Request for
Request for
power step power step power step
2
3
4
Configuration of output RL2
Configuration of output RL3
Configuration of output RL4
Configuration of output RL5
Configuration of output RL6
Configuration of output RL7
These
parameters
are used to assign various
functions
to relays as required by the type of application.
0= Not in use
1=
Reversing valve
circuit 1
2=
Reversing valve
circuit 2
3=
Condensation fan
circuit 1
4=
Condensation fan
circuit 2
5= Electrical heater 1
6= Electrical heater 2
7=
Hydraulic pump
8= Evaporator fan
9=
Power Step
2
10=
Power Step
3
11=
Power Step
4
Polarity of output RL2
Polarity of output RL3
Polarity of output RL4
Polarity of output RL5
Polarity of output RL8
Relay polarity may be set for the corresponding
outputs
.
0=relay on if output active
1=relay off if output not active
Configuration of analogue output 1 (AN1 or TK1)
Configuration of analogue output 2 (AN2 or TK2)
Condensation fan control outputs
are available with 2 types of signal.
0= Suignal for phase cut fan control
1= 4-20mA output
Not in use
Selection
of operating mode
0=
Selection
from
keyboard
1=
Selection
from digital input
Enable
dynamic set point
If enabled, this function permits automatic variation of the working
set point
depending on outdoor temperature or on a
4-20mA analogue input. The parameter has no meaning if PaH13 ≠ 3 or PaH14 ≠ 3.
0= Function disabled
1= Function enabled
Maximum
dynamic set point
offset in
cooling
mode
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
32
Pa H52
Pa H53
Pa H54
Pa H55
Pa H56
Pa H57
Pa H58
Pa H59
Pa H60
Pa H61
Pa H62
Pa H63
Pa H64
Pa H65
Pa H66
Pa H67
Pa H68
Pa H68
Pa A01
Pa A02
Pa A03
Pa A04
Pa A05
Pa A06
Pa A07
Pa A08
Pa A09
Pa A10
Pa A11
The maximum value that may be added to the
set point
in
cooling
mode (COO) when the
DYNAMIC SET POINT
function is enabled.
Maximum
dynamic set point
offset in
heating
mode
The maximum value that may be added to the
set point
in
heating
mode (HEA) when the
DYNAMIC SET POINT
function is enabled.
Outdoor temperature
set point
in
cooling
mode
The outdoor temperature value on the basis of which …
The parameter is significant only if the
dynamic set point
function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoor temperature probe.
Outdoor temperature
set point
in
heating
mode
The parameter is significant only if the
dynamic set point
function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoor temperature probe.
Outdoor temperature differential in
cooling
mode
The parameter is significant only if the
dynamic set point
function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoor temperature probe.
Outdoor temperature differential in
heating
mode
The parameter is significant only if the
set point
function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoor temperature probe.
Offset ST1,
Offset ST2,
Offset ST3
These
parameters
may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature or pressure reading and the actual temperature or pressure.
Offset ST4
Offset ST5
These
parameters
may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature reading and the actual temperature.
Offset ST6
This parameter may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature (or pressure) reading and the actual temperture or pressure.
Mains frequency
Mains frequency 50 Hz
Mains frequency 60 Hz
Selection
°C or °F
0= degrees °C
1= degrees °F
Family serial address,
Device serial address
These
parameters
may be used to address the device when connected to a personal computer or supervision system.
Normally both are 0.
User password
May be used to enter a password for access to level two
parameters
, and to copy
parameters
from the instrument to the
copy card
.
Copy card
write password
The password that must be entered to copy
parameters
to the
copy card
.
Presence of
keyboard
ALARM PARAMETERS
:
Low pressure pressure switch by-pass time.
Determines the delay between starting up the compressor and starting up the low pressure digital alarm
diagnostics
.
Expressed in seconds.
Low pressure
alarm events per hour
Used to set the number of low pressure digital
alarm events per hour
beyond which the system will switch from automatic
reset
to
manual reset
.
Bypass pump activation flow switch
Determines the delay between activation of the
hydraulic pump
and activation of the flow switch alarm
diagnostics
.
Expressed in seconds.
Duration of active flow switch input
May be used to set the amount of time for which the flow switch digital input must remain active to generate a flow switch alarm. The timer starts after the flow switch by-pass time. Expressed in seconds.
Duration of inactive flow switch input
May be used to set the time for which the flow switch digital input must remain inactive to be included in the corresponding alarm. Expressed in seconds.
Number of flow switch
alarms
/hour
May be used to set the number of flow switch
digital alarms
per hour after which the alarm is switched from automatic to
manual reset
. When this occurs, the
hydraulic pump
is deactivated.
By-pass compressor thermal switch following compressor on
Determines the delay between compressor activation and activation of the compressor thermal switch digital
diagnostics
alarm. Expressed in seconds.
Compressor thermal switch
alarm events per hour
May be used to set a number of compressor thermal switch
alarm events per hour
beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic to
manual reset
.
Number of fan thermal switch events per hour
May be used to set a number of fan thermal events per hour beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic to
manual reset
.
Anti-freeze alarm by-pass
Determines the delay between turning on the machine (
selection
of an operating mode or switch from OFF->ON) and activation of the compressor thermal switch digital alarm
diagnostics
. Expressed in seconds.
Anti-freeze alarm
set point
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
33
Pa C03
Pa C04
Pa C05
Pa C06
Pa C07
Pa C08
Pa A12
Pa A13
Pa A14
Pa A15
Pa A16
Pa A17
Pa A18
Pa A19
Pa A20
Pa A21
Pa A22
Pa A23
Pa A24
Pa A25
Pa A26
Pa C01
Pa C02
Pa F01
Pa F02
Pa F03
Pa F04
Pa F05
May be used to set the temperature below which the anti-freeze alarm is triggered.
Anti-freeze alarm
hysteresis
May be used to set the differential value of the anti-freeze alarm.
Anti-freeze
alarm events per hour
May be used to set a number of anti-freeze
alarm events per hour
beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic to
manual reset
.
Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation
set point
May be used to set a condensation pressure/temperature value beyond which the high pressure alarm will be triggered.
Analogue input high pressure/temperature
hysteresis
May be used to set the differential for the analogue high pressure alarm.
Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation bypass
Determines the delay after turning on of the first compressor in the
cooling
circuit and activation of the corresponding analogue input low pressure/temperature analogue alarm
diagnostics
.
Analogue input low pressure/temperature activation
set point
May be used to set a temperature/pressure value below which the low pressure alarm will be triggered.
Analogue input low pressure/temperature
hysteresis
May be used to set the differential for the analogue low pressure/temperature alarm.
Number of analogue input low pressure
alarm events per hour
May be used to set a number of low pressure analogue
alarm events per hour
beyond which the alarm will be switched from automatic to
manual reset
.
Machine out of coolant differential
If the difference between the absolute value of the
set point
and of the control probe exceeds this parameter, the machine out of coolant timer will start.
Bypass machine out of coolant
Determines the delay between the turning on of the first compressor in the corresponding
cooling
circuit and activation of the machine out of coolant alarm
diagnostics
. Expressed in minutes.
Duration of machine out of coolant
Determines the duration of the condition described under parameter A20 beyond which the machine out of coolant alarm will be triggered.
Machine out of coolant alarm triggered
Enables machine out of coolant alarm
diagnostics
0=
diagnostics
disabled
1=
diagnostics
enabled
Enable low pressure alarm during defrosting
Enables the minimum alarm during defrosting.
0= Low pressure alarm
diagnostics
disabled during defrosting
1= Low pressure alarm
diagnostics
enabled during defrosting
Input over-temperature
set point
Temperature value ST1 above which the high temperature alarm E46 is triggered.
Input over-temperature duration
Determines the duration of the condition described for parameter A25 beyond which the input over-temperature alarm is triggered.
COMPRESSOR PARAMETERS
OFF-ON safety time
The minimum amount of time that must pass between turning off the compressor and turning it on again. Expressed in tens of seconds.
ON-ON safety time
The minimum amount of time that must pass between turning the compressor on and turning it on again. Expressed in tens of seconds.
Hysteresis
regulation algorithm during
cooling
May be used to select intervention differential in
cooling
mode.
Hysteresis
regulation algorithm during
heating
May be used to select intervention differential in
heating
mode.
Regulation algorithm step intervention differential
May be used to set a temperature differential in relation to the
set point
beyond which the second step is activated.
Compressor on interval
May be used to set a delay between turning on of two
compressors
.
Compressor off interval
May be used to set a delay between turning off of two
compressors
.
Capacity step on interval
May be used to set a delay between turning on of compressor and of capacity steps.
FAN CONTROL PARAMETERS
:
Fan output configuration
0 = proportional fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on
parameters
)
1 = fan output “on-off”; in this mode the regulation algorithm performs the same calculation as in proportional fan output, but if the result is greater than 0, regulation algorithmoutput will be 100.
2 = on-off operation in response to request from compressor. In this mode output is 0 if no compressor in the circuit is on, or 100% if at least one compressor in the circuit is on.
Fan
pick-up
time
Time for which fan runs at maximum speed after starting up. Expressed in seconds/10.
Fan
phase shift
This parameter may be used to calibrate fan control output in proportion to the type of fan in use, adjusting it to suit the fan’s typical current/voltage
phase shift
.
Impulse duration
of triac on
May be used to vary the length of the impulse from the triac command.
Functioning in resposne to compressor request
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
34
Pa F06
Pa F07
Pa F08
Pa F09
Pa F10
Pa F11
Pa F12
Pa F13
Pa F14
Pa F15
Pa F16
Pa F17
Pa F18
Pa F19
Pa F20
Pa F21
Pa F22
Pa F23
Pa F24
Pa P01
Pa P02
Pa P03
Pa r01
Pa r02
Pa r03
0= if compressor is off, fan is off
1= condensation control independent of compressor
Minimum speed during
cooling
Minimum value of proportional fan control during
cooling
. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0 to 100%,.
Maximum silent speed during
cooling
Maximum value of proportional fan control during
cooling
. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0 to 100%,.
Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure
set point
during
cooling
Condensation pressure/temperature value below which the fan runs at minimum
cooling
speed.
Proportional band during
cooling
Temperature/pressure differential corresponding to change from minimum to silent maximum fan speed during
cooling
(F07).
Fan
cut-off
differential
Condensation temperature/pressure differential in relation to temperature/pressure
set point
(F08 or F14) beyond which fan is cut off.
Cut-off hysteresis
.
Condensation temperature/pressure differential for
cut-off
.
Cut-off
bypass time
Determines the amount of time after fan start-up during which fan
cut-off
is excluded. Expressed in seconds.
Maximum speed during
cooling
May be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value in
cooling
mode.
Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure during
cooling
Condensation pressure/temperature value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F13.
Minimum speed during
heating
Minimum proportional fan control value in
heating
mode. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0 to 100%,.
Maximum silent speed during
heating
Maximum value of proportional fan control during
heating
. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0 to 100%,.
Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure
set point
during
heating
Condensation temperature/pressure value above which the fan operates at minimum
heating
speed.
Proportional band during
heating
Temperature/pressure differential corresponding to a change from minimum to maximum silent fan speed during
heating
(F16).
Maximum speed during
heating
May be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value during
heating
.
Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure
set point
during
heating
Condensation temperature/pressure value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F19.
Preventilation in
cooling
mode
May be used to set a preventilation time in
cooling
mode before compressor combines on in order to prevent.…
Combined or separate fan control
Parameter F22 may be used to configure dual circuit machines with a single condenser.
Parameter F22 condensation type
0= separate condensers
1= combined condenser.
If
Pa F22
= 0 the fans are independent and depend on condensation pressure/temperature and the status of the
compressors
in the circuits. If
Pa F22
= 1 the
outputs
of the 2 fans are parallel and they are controlled:
on the basis of the greater of the two circuit condensation probes in
cooling
mode
on the basis of the smaller of the two circuit condensation probes in
heating
mode
If there is no condensation probe in one of the 2 circuits, a configuration alarm will be generated.
Fan activation temperature/pressure
set point
during defrosting
During defrosting, if temperature/pressure exceeds the “fan activation during defrosting” threshold (
Pa F23
) the fans will come on at full power.
Fan activation
hysteresis
during defrosting
Condensation temperature/pressure differential for fan
control during defrost
ing.
PUMP PARAMETERS
Pump operating mode
May be used to determine pump operating mode:
0=continuous operation
1=operation in response to a request from the regulation algorithm
Delay between pump ON and compressor ON
May be used to set a delay between starting a pump and starting a compressor, expressed in seconds.
Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFF
May be used to set a delay between turning off a compressor and turning off a pump, expressed in seconds.
ANTI-FREEZE/BOILER
PARAMETERS
Configuration of electrical heaters in
defrost
mode
Determines electrical heater operation during defrosting
0=come on only in response to a request from the regulation algorithm
1=always on during defrosting
Configuration of electrical heaters on in
cooling
mode
Determines electrical heater operation in
cooling
mode
0=off during
cooling
1=on during
cooling
(in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)
Configuration of electrical heaters on in
heating
mode
Determines electrical heater operation in
heating
mode
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
35
Pa r04
Pa r05
Pa r06
Pa d02
Pa d03
Pa d04
Pa d05
Pa d06
Pa d07
Pa d08
Pa d09
Pa r07
Pa r08
Pa r09
Pa r10
Pa r11
Pa r12
Pa r13
Pa r14
Pa r15
Pa d01
Configuration parameters
0=off during
heating
1= on during
cooling
(in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)
Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probe
Configuration of electrical heater 2 control probe
Determines the control probes belonging to electrical heaters in
heating
mode
0= Not present
1=Control probe ST1
2=Control probe ST2
3= Control probe ST5
Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on
stand-by
Determines the status of electrical heaters when the instrument is OFF or on
stand-by
0=Always off when OFF or on
stand-by
1=On when OFF or on
stand-by
(in response to anti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm)
Set point
of anti-freeze electrial heater 1 in
heating
mode
Temperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in
heating
mode.
Set point
of anti-freeze electrical heater 1 in
cooling
mode
Temperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in
cooling
mode.
Maximum
set point
of anti-freeze electrical heaters
Determines the maximum setting of the anti-freeze electrical heater
set point
s.
Minimum
set point
of anti-freeze electrical heaters
Determines the minimumsetting of the anti-freeze electrcial heater
set point
s.
Anti-freeze heater
hysteresis
Anti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm
hysteresis
.
Set point
of external anti-freeze electrical heaters
Temperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters in the secondary circuit come on.
Set point
of electrical heater 2 in
heating
mode
Temperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in
heating
mode.
Set point
of electrical heater 2 in
cooling
mode
Temperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in
cooling
mode.
Enable
supplementary electrical heaters
DEFROST PARAMETERS
::
Defrost
enabled
0=
defrost
function enabled
1=
defrost
function disabled
Defrost start
temperature / pressure
Temperature/pressure below which the
defrost
cycle is started.
Defrost
interval (response time)
Duration for which probe remains below
defrost start
temperature/pressure, expressed in minutes.
Defrost end
temperature/pressure
Temperature/pressure above which
defrost end
s.
Maximum
defrost
time (time-out)
Maximum duration of
defrost
in minutes.
Compressor-
reversing valve
wait time (anti-bleeding)
Wait time between compressor going off and reversal of the 4-way valve at the beginning of the
defrost
cycle.
Drip time
Wait time at the end of the
defrost
cycle between the compressor going off and the reversal of the 4-way valve.
Temperature at which
defrost start
s if
Pa H49
= 1
Temperature below which the
defrost
cycle is started.
Temperature at which
defrost end
s if
Pa H49
=1
Temperature above which the
defrost
cycle is ended.
Par.
Pa H01
Pa H02
Pa H03
Pa H04
Pa H05
Pa H06
Pa H07
Pa H08
Pa H09
Pa H10
Pa H11
Pa H12
Pa H13
Pa H14
Pa H15
Pa H16
Pa H17
Pa H18
Pa H19
9.2 Parameters table
All ”
Energy 400
”
parameters
are listed in the table below.
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS
*
Description
Maximum
set point
during
heating
Minimum
set point
during
heating
Maximum
set point
during
cooling
Minimum
set point
during
cooling
Number of circuits on machine
Number of
compressors
per circuit
Number of capacity steps per compressor
Compressors
on sequence
Circuit balancing
Presence of heat pump
Configuration ST1
Configuration ST2
Configuration ST3
Configuration ST4
Configuration ST5
Configuration ST6
Bottom of scale pressure value
Polarity ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4
Polarity ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8
Value Limits
H02
÷
90.0
-40.0 ÷ H01
H04
÷
90.0
-40.0 ÷ H03
0 ÷ 2
0
÷
4
0 ÷ 3
0
÷
1
0
÷
1
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
4
0 ÷ 3
0 ÷ 5
0
÷
3
0 ÷ 5
0
÷
3
0-350
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
1
Unit of meas.
°
C
° C
°
C
° C
Num
Num
Num
Flag
Flag
Flag
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
KPa*10
Flag
Flag
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
36
Alarm parameters
*
Pa A01
Pa A02
Pa A03
Pa A04
Pa A05
Pa A06
Pa A07
Pa A08
Pa A09
Pa A10
Pa A11
Pa A12
Pa A13
Pa A14
Pa H36
Pa H37
Pa H38
Pa H39
Pa H40
Pa H41
Pa H42
Pa H43
Pa H44
Pa H45
Pa H46
Pa H47
Pa H48
Pa H49
Pa H50
Pa H51
Pa H20
Pa H21
Pa H22
Pa H23
Pa H24
Pa H25
Pa H26
Pa H27
Pa H28
Pa H29
Pa H30
Pa H31
Pa H32
Pa H33
Pa H34
Pa H35
Pa H52
Pa H53
Pa H54
Pa H55
Pa H56
Pa H57
Pa H58
Pa H59
Pa H60
Pa H61
Pa H62
Pa H63
Pa H64
Pa H65
Pa H66
Pa H67
Offset of
dynamic set point
during
heating
Dynamic outdoor temp.
set point
during
cooling
Dynamic outdoor temp.
set point
during
heating
Delta dynamic outdoor temp.
set point
during
cooling
Delta dynamic outdoor temp.
set point
during
heating
Offset ST1
Offset ST2
Offset ST3
Offset ST4
Offset ST5
Offset ST6
0=50 Hz 1=60 Hz
0= °C 1=°F
Family serial address
Device serial address
User password
-12.7 ÷ 12.7
0
÷
255
0 ÷ 255
-12.7
÷
12.7
° C
°
C
° C
°
C
-12.7
÷
12.7
-12.7 ÷ 12.7
°
C
° C
-12.7
÷
12.7
°
C
-127 ÷ 127 ° C/10-Kpa*10
-12.7 ÷ 12.7
-12.7
÷
12.7
° C
°
C
-127 ÷ 127 ° C/10-Kpa*10
0
÷
1 Flag
Flag
Num.
Num.
Pa H68 Copy card
password
If
parameters
in this category are modified, the controller must be turned off and on again to ensure correct functioning.
Num.
Num.
ALARM PARAMETERS
0 ÷ 14
0
÷
14
0 ÷ 255
0 ÷ 255
Par.
Description Value Limits
Pa A15
Pa A16
Pa A17
Pa A18
Pa A19
Polarity ID9 ID10 ID11 ST4
Polarity ST1
Polarity ST2
Configuration ID1
Configuration ID2
Configuration ID3
Configuration ID4
Configuration ID5
Configuration ID6
Configuration ID7
Configuration ID8
Configuration ID9
Configuration ID10
Configuration ID11
Configuration ST4 if digital input
Configuration relay 2
Configuration relay 3
Configuration relay 4
Configuration relay 5
Configuration relay 6
Configuration relay 7
Polarity RL2
Polarity RL3
Polarity RL4
Polarity RL5
Alarm relay polarity
Configuration fan 1 output
Configuration fan 2 output
Free
Selection
of operating mode
Enable
dynamic set point
Offset of
dynamic set point
during
cooling
Low pressure switch bypass time after compressor on
Low pressure
Flow switch bypass time after pump on
Duration of active flow switch input
Duration of inactive flow switch input
Number of flow switch
Bypass compressor thermal switch from compressor on
Number of
alarms
Number of fan thermal switch alarm events/hour
Anti-freeze alarm bypass after ON-OFF
Anti-freeze alarm activation
Hysteresis alarm events per hour compressors alarm events per hour
1 + 2 thermal switch
set point
of anti-freeze alarm
Anti-freeze alarm events/hour
Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation
point
Analogue input high pressure
hysteresis
Analogue input low pressure activation bypass
Analogue input low pressure activation
set point
Analogue input low pressure
hysteresis
Analogue input low pressure
alarm events per hour
/hour
set
0 ÷ 11
0
÷
11
0 ÷ 11
0
÷
11
0
÷
11
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
1
0 ÷ 1
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
1
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
2
0
÷
1
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
1
-12.7 ÷ 12.7
0 ÷ 19
0
÷
19
0 ÷ 19
0
÷
19
0
÷
19
0 ÷ 19
0
÷
19
0 ÷ 11
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
1
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
19
0
÷
19
0 ÷ 19
0
÷
19
0 ÷ 19
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
÷
÷
÷
÷
÷
÷
÷
÷
÷
÷
-127
0
0
0
÷
÷
÷
255
255
255
255
255
255
255
255
255
255
÷ 127
25.5
255
900
0 ÷ 255
0
÷
255
-500
0
0
÷
÷
÷ 800
255
255
Unit of measurement
Seconds
Num
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Num
Seconds
Num
Num
Minutes
° C
°
C
Num
° C/10 – Kpa*10
Flag
Flag
Flag
Num
Flag
Flag
Flag
° C
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
Flag
Flag
Flag
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
Flag
Flag
Flag
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
° C/10 – Kpa*10
°
°
Seconds
C/10 – Kpa*10
C/10 – Kpa*10
Num
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
37
Compressor parameters
Fan control parameters
Pump parameters
Electrical heater parameters
Par.
Pa F01
Pa F02
Pa F03
Pa F04
Pa F05
Pa F06
Pa F07
Pa F08
Pa F09
Pa F10
Pa F11
Pa F12
Pa F13
Pa F14
Pa F15
Pa F16
Pa F17
Pa F18
Pa F19
Pa F20
Pa F21
Pa F22
Pa F23
Pa F24
Pa F25
Pa A20
Pa A21
Pa A22
Pa A23
Pa A24
Pa A25
Pa A26
Par.
Pa C01
Pa C02
Pa C03
Pa C04
Pa C05
Pa C06
Pa C07
Pa C08
Par.
Pa P01
Pa P02
Pa P03
Par.
Pa r01
Pa R02
Pa r03
Pa r04
Pa r05
Pa r06
Pa r07
Pa r08
Pa r09
Pa r10
Pa r11
Pa R12
Pa r13
Pa r14
Machine out of coolant differential
Machine out of coolant bypass
Machine out of coolant duration
Machine out of coolant alarm triggered
Enable low pressure alarm during
defrost
Input over-temperature
set point
Input over-temperature duration
COMPRESSOR PARAMETERS
Description
ON-OFF safety time
ON-ON safety time
Hysteresis
regulation algorithm during
cooling
Hysteresis
regulation algorithm during
heating
Regulation algorithm step intervention delta
Compressor – compressor on interval
Compressor – compressor off interval
Capacity step on interval
FAN CONTROL PARAMETERS
Description
Fan output mode
Fan
pick-up
time
Fan
phase shift
Impulse duration
of triak on
Functioning in response to compressor request
Minimum speed during
cooling
Maximum silent speed during
cooling
Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure
set point
during
cooling
Prop. band during
cooling
Delta
cut-off
Cut-off hysteresis
.
Bypass time
cut-off
Max speed during
cooling
Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure
set point
during
cooling
Minimum speed during
heating
Maximum silent speed during
heating
Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure
set point
during
heating
Prop. band during
heating
Maximum fan speed during
heating
Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure
set point
during
heating
Preventilation in
cooling
mode
Combined or separate fan control
Fan activation temperature/pressure
set point
during defrosting
Fan activation
hysteresis
during defrosting
Preventilation after defrosting
PUMP PARAMETERS
Description
Pump operating mode
Delay between pump ON and compressor ON
Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFF
ELECTRICAL HEATER PARAMETERS
Description
Configuration of electrical heaters in
Configuration of electrical heaters on in
Configuration of electrical heaters on in
Set point
Set point
Max.
Min.
set point set point hysteresis
Set point
Set point
Set point
of electrical heater 1 in
of electrical heater 1 in
electrical heaters
electrical heaters
of anti-freeze heaters
of external anti-freeze electrical heaters
of electrical heater 2 in
of electrical heater 2 in
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
defrost heating cooling heating cooling
mode
cooling heating
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
mode
Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probe
Configuration of electrical heater 2 control probe
Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on
STAND-BY
Value
0
0
0
0
0
÷
÷
÷
0
0
÷
÷
255
255
255
÷
÷
1
1
255
255
Limits
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
255
0
÷
255
Value Limits
0 ÷ 1
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
1
0 ÷ 6
0
÷
6
0
÷
1
Pr09 ÷ Pr10
Pr09
÷
Pr10
P r10 ÷ 127
-127 ÷ P r09
0
÷
25.5
Pr09 ÷ Pr10
Pr09
÷
Pr10
Pr09
÷
Pr10
°
°
C
Minutes
Minutes
Flag
Flag
C
S*10
Value
Value
Limits
0
÷
255
0 ÷ 255
0
÷
25.5
0
÷
25.5
0
÷
255
0 ÷ 255
0 ÷ 255
Unit of measurement
Seconds*10
Seconds*10
°
C
°
C
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds
Limits
0
÷
2
0
÷
255
0 ÷ 100
0
÷
255
0 ÷ 1
0 ÷ 100
Unit of measurement
Num.
Seconds/10
% uS*100
Flag
%
0
÷
100 %
-500 ÷ 800 ° C/10 — Kpa*10
0 ÷ 255
0 ÷ 255
0
÷
255
0 ÷ 255
°
°
°
C/10 — Kpa*10
C/10 — Kpa*10
C/10 — Kpa*10
Seconds
0
÷
100 %
-500
÷
800
°
C/10 — Kpa*10
0
÷
100
0 ÷ 100
%
%
-500
÷
800
°
C/10 — Kpa*10
0 ÷ 255
0
÷
100
° C/10 — Kpa*10
%
-500 ÷ 800 ° C/10 — Kpa*10
0 ÷ 255
0 ÷ 1
Seconds
Flag
-500
÷
800
°
C/10 — Kpa*10
0
÷
255
0 ÷ 255
°
C/10 — Kpa*10
Seconds
Unit of measurement
Flag
Seconds
Seconds
Unit of measurement
Flag
Flag
Flag
Num
Num
Flag
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
°
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
38
Defrost parameters
Extension parameters
Pa r15
Pa r16
Pa r17
Par.
Pa d01
Pa d02
Pa d03
Pa d04
Pa d05
Pa d06
Pa d07
Pa d08
Pa d09
Pa d10
Pa d11
Par.
Pa N01
Pa N02
Pa N03
Pa N04
Pa N05
Pa N06
Pa N07
Enable
supplementary electrical heaters
Delta of activation of supplementary heater 1
Delta of activation of supplementary heater 2
DEFROST PARAMETERS
Description
Defrost
enabled
Defrost start
temperature/pressure
Defrost
interval
Defrost end
temperature/pressure
Maximum
defrost
time
Compressor-
reversing valve
wait time
Drip time
Delay between defrosting of circuits
Output probe
defrost
circuit 1
Output probe
defrost
circuit 2
Delay in
compressors
on in
defrost
mode
EXTENSION PARAMETERS
Description
Polarity of ID12 ID13 ID14 ID15
Configuration ID12
Configuration ID13
Configuration ID14
Configuration ID15
Configuration relay 9
Configuration relay 10
Value
Value
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
25.5
0 ÷ 25.5
Flag
°C
°C
Limits Unit of measurement
0 ÷ 1 Flag
-500
÷
800
°
C/10 — Kpa*10
0 ÷ 255 Minutes
-500 ÷ 800 ° C/10 – Kpa*10
0
÷
255
0 ÷ 255
0
0
÷
÷
255
255
0 ÷ 8
0
÷
8
0 ÷ 255
Minutes
Seconds
Seconds
Seconds*10
Num
Num
Seconds
Limits
0 ÷ 1
0
÷
19
0
÷
19
0 ÷ 19
0
÷
19
0 ÷ 11
0 ÷ 11
Unit of measurement
Flag
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
Num
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
39
Alarms
Alarm events per hour
10 DIAGNOSTICS
x
“
Energy 400
” can perform full systems
diagnostics
and signal a series of
alarms
.
Alarm trigger and
reset
modes are set using
parameters Pa A01
–
Pa A26
.
For some
alarms
the signal will not be given for a certain amount of time, determined by a parameter.
For some
alarms
the number of alarm events is counted; if the number of alarm events in the past hour exceeds a certain threshold set by a parameter, the alarm will switch from automatic to
manual reset
.
Alarms
are sampled every 113 seconds;
Example: if the number of events/hour is set to 3, the duration of an alarm must fall between 2*113 seconds and 3*113 seconds for the alarm to be switched from automatic to
manual reset
.
Automatic reset Manual reset
Alarm sampling
Alarm
Counter
1
225 s 225 s
2
225 s
3
225 s
Time
If an alarm is triggered more than once within one sampling period (113 seconds), only one alarm will be counted.
Alarms
with
manual reset
are
reset
by pressing the ON-OFF button and releasing
Manual reset
shuts down corresponding
loads
and requires an operator to intervene (
reset
the alarm using the ON-OFF control).
Manual reset alarms
are used mainly to identify problems which could result in damage to the system
10.1 List of alarms
When an alarm is triggered, two things occur:
• The corresponding
loads
are shut down
•
The alarm appears on the
keyboard display
The alarm message consists of a code with the format “Enn” (where nn is a 2-digit number identifying the type of alarm, such as: E00, E25, E39….).
All possible
alarms
are listed in the table below, along with their codes and the corresponding
loads
that will be shut down:
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
40
Tabella Allarmi
CODE
E00
E01
E02
E03
E04
E05
E06
E07
MESSAGE
Remote off
High pressure circuit 1
Low pressure circuit 1
Thermal switch protection compressor 1
Thermal switch protection condenser fan circuit 1
Anti-freeze circuit 1
Probe ST2 fault
Probe ST3 fault
DESCRIPTION
•
All
loads
will be shut down;
• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Remote OFF”
(refer to
digital inputs
)
•
Compressors
in circuit 1 will be shut down;
•
Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure circuit 1” (refer to
digital inputs
)
•
Compressors
in circuit 1 will be shut down; also condenser fans if condensation is separate for the 2 circuits (refer to
combined or separate condensation
);
• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressure circuit 1” (refer to
digital inputs
);
• Automatically
reset
unless
alarm events per hour
reaches the value of parameter
Pa A02
, after which manually
reset
;
• Inactive during timer
Pa A01
after compressor on or reversal of 4-way valve (
reversing valve
) in circuit 1
•
Compressor 1 will be shut down;
• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch compressor 1” (refer to
digital inputs
);
• Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reaches the value of parameter
Pa A07
, after which manually
reset
;
• Inactive during timer
Pa A08
after compressor on.
•
Fans and
compressors
in circuit 1 will be shut down; if the 2 circuits are set up for combined condensation, (refer to
combined or separate condensation
)
compressors
in circuit 2 will also be shut down;
•
Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch fan circuit 1” (refer to
digital inputs
);
•
Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reaches the value of parameter
Pa A09
, after which manually
reset
;
•
Fans and
compressors
in circuit 1 will be shut down;
• Active if analogue probe ST2 (refer to
analogue inputs
) is configured as anti-freeze probe (
Pa H12
= 1);
• Triggered when probe ST2 detects a value lower than
Pa A11
;
•
Turned off if probe ST2 detects a value greater than
Pa A11
+
Pa A12
;
•
Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reaches the value of parameter
Pa A13
,after which manually
reset
;
•
Inactive during timer
Pa A10
after
Energy 400
is turned on with the On-OFF key (refer to
keyboard
) or from the digital input ON-OFF (refer to
digital inputs
) or when
heating
mode is started.
•
All
loads
will be shut down;
• Triggered if probe ST2, configured as an analogue input, shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..
100°C).
•
All
loads
will be shut down;
• Triggered if probe ST3, configured as an analogue input, shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..
100°C).
COMP.1 COMP.2 COMP.3 COMP.4
FAN1
YES YES YES
LOADS
SHUT DOWN
YES YES
FAN2
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES1
YES1
YES1
YES1
YES
YES
YES1
YES1
YES1
YES
YES1
YES
YES
2
—
YES1
YES1
YES1
YES
YES
YES
2
YES1
—
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
2
2
2
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
41
PUMP
YES
RES.1
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
RES.2
YES
YES
YES
E08
E09
E13
E19
E21
E22
E23
E24
External circuit 1 antifreeze
High pressure compressor 1
Thermal switch protection compressor 2
High pressure compressor 2
High pressure circuit 2
Low pressure circuit 2
Thermal switch protection compressor 3
Thermal switch protection condenser fan circuit 2
Anti-freeze circuit 2
• Fans and
compressors
will be shut down;
•
Active if analogue probe ST3 (refer to
analogue inputs
) is configured as an external anti-freeze probe (
Pa H13
= 4);
•
Active when probe ST3 detects a value lower than
Pa A11
;
• Goes off if probe ST3 detects a value greater than
Pa A11
+
Pa A12
;
• Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reach the value of parameter
Pa A13
, after which manually
reset
;
• Inactive during timer
Pa A10
after
Energy 400
is turned on using the On-OFF key (refer to
keyboard
) or ON-OFF digital input (refer to
digital inputs
) or
heating
mode is switched on.
Compressor 1 will be shut down;
Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure compressor 1” (refer to
digital inputs
);
Always manually
reset
Compressor 2 will be shut down;
Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch compressor 2” (refer to
digital inputs
);
Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reach the value of parameter
Pa A07
, after which manually
reset
;
Inactive during timer
Pa A08
after compressor is turned on.
Compressor 2 will be shut down;
Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure compressor 1” (refer to
digital inputs
);
Always manually
reset
Compressors
in circuit 2 will be shut down;
Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure circuit 2” (refer to
digital inputs
)
Compressors
in circuit 2 will be shut down, as well as condenser fans if the 2 circuits have separate condensation (refer to
combined or separate condensation
);
Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressure circuit 2” (refer to
digital inputs
);
Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reaches the value of parameter
Pa A02
, after which manually
reset
;
Inactive during timer
Pa A01
after compressor on or reversal of
4-way valve (
reversing valve
) of circuit 1
Compressor 3 will be shut down;
Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch compressor 3” (refer to
digital inputs
);
Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reach value of parameter
Pa A07
, after which manually
reset
;
Inactive during timer
Pa A08
after compressor on.
Fans and
compressors
in circuit 2 will be shut down; if the 2 circuits have combined condensation (refer to
combined or separate condensation
) the
compressors
in circuit 1 will also be shut down;
Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch circuit
2 fan” (refer to
digital inputs
);
Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reaches value of parameter
Pa A09
, after which manually
reset
;
Fans and
compressors
will be shut down;
YES
YES
YES2
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
YES
YES
YES
YES2
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
42
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES2
YES2
YES
YES2
YES
YES
E26
E27
E08
E29
E33
E39
E40
E41
Probe ST5 fault
Probe ST6 fault
External circuit 2 antifreeze
High pressure compressor 3
Thermal switch protection compressor 4
High pressure compressor 4
Probe ST1 fault
Flow switch
Active if analogue probe ST5 (refer to
analogue inputs
) is configured as anti-freeze probe (
Pa H15
= 1);
Triggered when probe ST5 detects a value below
Pa A11
;
Turns off when probe ST5 detects a value above
Pa A11
+
Pa
A12
;
Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reaches value of parameter
Pa A13
, after which manually
reset
;
Inactive during timer
Pa A10
after turning on
Energy 400
using
On-OFF key (refer to
keyboard
) or digital input ON-OFF
(refer to
digital inputs
) or start of
heating
mode.
All
loads
will be shut down;
Triggered if probe ST5, configured as an analogue input, shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).
All
loads
will be shut down;
Triggered if probe ST6, configured as an analogue input, shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).
• Fans and
compressors
will be shut down;
•
Active if analogue probe ST6 (refer to
analogue inputs
) is configured as an external anti-freeze probe (
Pa H13
= 4);
•
Active when probe ST6 detects a value lower than
Pa A11
;
• Goes off if probe ST6 detects a value greater than
Pa A11
+
Pa A12
;
• Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reach the value of parameter
Pa A13
, after which manually
reset
;
• Inactive during timer
Pa A10
after
Energy 400
is turned on using the On-OFF key (refer to
keyboard
) or ON-OFF digital input (refer to
digital inputs
) or
heating
mode is switched on.
Compressor 3 will be shut down;
Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure compressor 3” (refer to
digital inputs
);
Always manually
reset
Compressor 4 will be shut down;
Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch compressor 4” (refer to
digital inputs
);
Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reaches the value of parameter
Pa A07
, after which manually
reset
;
Inactive during timer
Pa A08
after compressor on.
Compressor 4 will be shut down;
Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure compressor 4” (refer to
digital inputs
);
Always manually
reset
All
loads
will be shut down;
Triggered if probe ST1, configured as an analogue input, shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).
All
compressors
, fans and pump will be cut off if manually
reset
;
Triggered if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (refer to
digital inputs
) remains active for an amount of time equal to
Pa A04
;
Goes off if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (refer to
digital inputs
) remains inactive for an amount of time equal to
Pa A05
;
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
43
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
SI
3
YES YES
E42
E45
E46
Probe ST4 fault
Configuration error
Automatically
reset
until
alarm events per hour
reaches the value of parameter
Pa A06
, after which manually
reset
;
Inactive during timer
Pa A03
following pump on.
All
loads
will be shut down;
Triggered if probe ST4, configured as an analogue input, shorts, is cut off, or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..
100°C).
All
loads
will be shut down;
Triggered if at least one of the following conditions apply:
H11= 2 (ST1 configured as request for
heating
), H12= 2 (ST2 configured as request for
cooling
) and both inputs are active.
Sum of
compressors
and capacity steps on machine exceeds 4
The
keyboard
is declared present (Pa H69=1) and there is no communication between the
keyboard
and the basic unit.
All
loads
will be shut down except the pump;
Triggered if probe ST1 (refer to
analogue inputs
) has a value exceeding
Pa A25
for an amount of time exceeding Pa 26 in
cooling
mode;
Goes off if probe ST1 (refer to
analogue inputs
) has a value lower than
Pa A25
–
Pa A12
;
Automatically
reset
.
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES YES YES YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES YES YES
YES YES YES
YES YES
1
If it belongs to circuit 1
2
If combined condensation system
3
Only if
manual reset
e
outputs
defined as capacity steps will go off if there is an alarm for the compressor to which they belong
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
44
The tables below list
alarms
by type (digital or analogue).
Digital alarms
TABLE OF
DIGITAL ALARMS
:
Alarm name Bypass trigger event Bypass time Trigger duration
None absent absent Compressor 1,2,3,4 high pressure alarm
High pressure circuit alarm
Low pressure alarm
None absent
Pa A01
absent absent
Flow switch alarm
Compressor 1,2,3,4 thermal switch alarm
Fan 1,2 thermal switch alarm
A compressor coming on in the circuit or reversal of 4-way valve
Pump coming on
Compressor coming on
None
Pa A03
Pa A07
absent
Pa A04
absent absent
TABLE OF
ANALOGUE ALARMS
:
Deactivation duration
absent absent absent
Pa A05
absent absent
N. alarm events/hour
Manual reset
Manual reset
Pa A02
Pa A06
Pa A08
Pa A09
Analogue alarms
External anti-freeze alarm circuit 1
External anti-freeze alarm circuit
2
Low pressure
/low temperature condensation alarm circuit
1
Low pressure
/low temperature condensation alarm circuit
2
High pressure
/high temperature condensation alarm circuit
1
Alarm name Event
Anti-freeze alarm circuit
1
Anti-freeze alarm circuit
2
On Off, input in
heating
mode, remote on off
On Off, input in
heating
mode, remote on off
On Off, input in
heating
mode, remote on off
On Off, input in
heating
mode, remote on off
Compressor turned on or reversal of 4way valve
Bypass time
Pa A10
Pa A10
Pa A10
Pa A10
Trigger
set point
Pa A11
Pa A11
Pa A11
Pa A11
Par A16
Pa A17
Compressor turned on or reversal of 4-
3way valve
None
Par A16 absent
Pa A17
Pa A14
absent
Pa A14
High pressure
/high temperature condensation alarm circuit
2
High temperature regulation algorithm alarm*
None
None absent
Pa A25
Hysteresis
N. alarm events/hour
Pa A12
positive
Pa A13
Regulation probe
ST2 if configuration parameter
Pa
H12
= 1, otherwise alarm is inactive
Pa A12
positive
Pa A13
Pa A12
positive
Pa A12
positive
Pa A18
positive
Pa A13
Pa A13
Pa A19
ST5 if configuration parameter
Pa
H15
= 1, otherwise alarm is inactive
ST3 if configuration parameter
Pa
H13
= 4, otherwise alarm is inactive
ST6 if configuration parameter
Pa
H16
= 4, otherwise alarm is inactive
ST3 se
Pa H13
=1 or 2 or else ST4 if
Pa H14
= 1, otherwise alarm is inactive
Pa A18
positive
Pa A19
ST6 if
Pa H16
is inactive
=1, otherwise alarm
Pa A15
negative
Manual reset
ST3 if
Pa H13
=1 or 2, or ST4 if
Pa
H14
= 1; otherwise alarm is inactive
Pa A15
negative
Manual reset
ST6 if
Pa H16
=1 or 2, otherwise alarm is inactive
Pa A12
negative
Automatic
reset
ST1
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
45
x
11 TECHNICAL FEATURES
11.1 Technical data
Power supply voltage
Power supply frequency
Power
Insulation class
Protection grade
Operating temperature
Operating humidity (non-condensing)
Storage temperature
Storage humidity (non-condensing)
Typical
12V~
50Hz/60Hz
5VA
1
Front panel
IP0
25°C
30%
25°C
30%
Min.
10V~
—
—
—
—
0°C
10%
-20°C
10%
Max.
14V~
—
—
—
—
60°C
90%
85°C
90%
11.2 Electromechanical features
110/230 V digital
outputs
Analogue
outputs
Analogue inputs
Digital inputs
Terminals and connectors
Serial ports n ° 8 5 A resistive relays; ¼ hp 230VAC; 1/8 hp 125VAC n° 2 triac piloting
outputs
or configurable 4-20 mA
outputs
n° 1 4-20 mA output n ° 4 NTC R
25
10K Ω
N° 2 configurable input or 4-20mA o r NTC R
25
10K
Ω n ° 11 voltage-free
digital inputs
10m A n
°
1 10-way high voltage connectors, step 7.5
n ° 2 16-way rapid clamp connectors for low voltage, step 4.2, AWG 16-28 n
°
1 p2.5 5–way connector for remote control and programming with external
copy card
, AWG 24-30 n
°
1 20-way connector for connection of
extension
n ° 1 3-way screw terminal for
remote keyboard
n° 1 9600 serial port n° 1 2400 serial port
current transformer
The instrument must be powered with a suitable
current transformer
with the following features:
•
Primary voltage:
• Secondary voltage:
•
Power supply frequency:
• Power:
230V~-15%
12V~
50Hz; 60Hz
5VA;
÷
+6%; 110V~±10%
11.3 Regulations
The product complies with the following European Community Directives:
•
Council Directive 73/23/CEE and subsequent modifications
•
Council directive 89/336/CEE and subsequent modifications
and complies with the following harmonised
regulations
:
•
LOW VOLTAGE: EN60730
•
EMISSION: EN50081-1 (EN55022)
•
IMMUNITY: EN50082-1 (IEC 801-2,3,4)
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
46
x
12 USE OF THE DEVICE
12.1 Permitted use
This product is used to control single and dual circuit chillers and heat pumps.
To ensure safety, the controller must be installed and operated in accordance with the instructions supplied, and access to high voltage
components
must be prevented under regular operating conditions. The device shall be properly protected against water and dust and shall be accessible by using a tool only. The device is suitable for incorporation in a household appliance and/or similar air conditioning device.
According to the reference
regulations
, it is classified:
• In terms of construction, as an automatic electronic control device to be incorporated with independent assembly or integrated;
• In terms of automatic operating features, as a type 1 action control device, with reference to manufacturing tolerances and drifts;
• As a class 2 device in relation to protection against electrical shock;
•
As a class A device in relation to software structure and class.
12.2 Forbidden use
Any use other than the
permitted use
is forbidden.
Please note that relay contacts supplied are functional and are subject to fault (in that they are controlled by an electronic component and be shorted or remain open); protection devices recommended by product standards or suggested by common sense in response to evident safety requirements shall be implemented outside of the instrument.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
47
13 RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKS
x
Microtech shall not be held liable for any damage incurred as a result of:
•
installation
/use other than those intended, and, in particular, failure to comply with the safety instructions specified by applicable
regulations
and/or provided in this document;
• use with equipment which does not provide adequate protection against electric shocks, water and dust under the effective conditions of
installation
;
• use with equipment which permits access to hazardous parts without the use of tools;
•
installation
/use with equipment which does not comply with current
regulations
and legislation.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
48
OR logico
Scroll up
Stand-by
Reset
Reset alarm
Manual reset
Scroll down
BLINK
Average number of hours
Loads
Set Point
Range
Hysteresis
Permanent memory
Cut-off
14 GLOSSARY
x
Multiple inputs with an OR relationship to one another are equivalent to a single input with the following status:
• Active if at least one input is active
•
Inactive if no input is active
To “
Scroll up
” a menu means listing the various
parameters
from the bottom up (Pa10 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 08 ….)
Indicates that the instrument is waiting, in
stand-by
mode; all
functions
are suspended.
Set to zero.
Resetting an alarm means reactivating it ready for a new signal.
A
manual reset alarm
must be
reset
using the
keyboard
.
To “
Scroll down
” in a menu is to list
parameters
from the top down (Pa08 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 10 ….)
Means flashing; normally refers to leds
Average number of hours
is the ratio between the total number of hours for which the
compressors
are available and the number of
compressors
in the circuit
Devices in the system, including
compressors
, fans,
hydraulic pump
, electrical anti-freeze heaters…
A reference value (set by the user) defining the system’s operating status, such as the thermostat that controls temperature in the home: if we want to maintain a temperature of 20 °C we set the
set point
to 20°C (the
heating
system will come on if the temperature in the house falls below 20°C, and go off if it exceeds this value).
Values falling within a given interval;
Range
1…100 indicates all values between 1 and 100
A
hysteresis
is normally defined around a
set point
to prevent frequent oscillation of the change of status of the load being controlled;
Example: suppose we have a
set point
of 20 °C on a probe for measurement of room temperature, above which a compressor will be started up;
When room temperature nears the
set point
(20 °C) there will be an unstable phase during which the relay which starts up the compressor will frequently switch from ON to OFF and vice versa, which could result in serious damage to the system.
To prevent this problem a
hysteresis
is defined: an interval of tolerance within which there will be no change in status; in our example, we could set a
hysteresis
of 1 °C, in which case the compressor would be started up at 21 °C (
set point
+
hysteresis
) and turned off at 19 °C (
set point
–
hysteresis
)
Memory in which data is maintained even when the device is turned off (as distinct from temporary memory, the data in which is lost when the device is turned off.)
Temperature/pressure below or above which proportional output is cut off.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
49
15 ANALITIC INDEX
A
Alarm events per hour
………………………………….40
Alarm parameters
………………………………………..37
Alarms
…………………………………………………………..40
Analogue alarms
………………………………………….45
Analogue inputs
…………………………………………….6
configuration table …………………………………7 resolution and precision……………………………7
Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater control
……………………………………………………….27 diagram……………………………………………………..27
Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters
…………………………………………………………………..19
configuration………………………………………….19 probe configuration…………………………………19
Average number of hours
…………………………….49
B
BLINK
…………………………………………………………….49
C
CF (Control Fan) Modules
……………………………..5
Combined or Separate Condensation
…………26
Components
……………………………………………………5
Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences
…………………………………………………………………..16
Compressor configuration
……………………………15
Simple
compressors
…………………………………15 with 1 capacity step…………………………………15 with 2 or 3 capacity steps………………………..15
Compressor control – regulation algorithm
.23
Cooling
diagram……………………………………..23
Heating
diagram……………………………………….24
Compressor parameters
……………………………….38
Compressor timing
……………………………………….17
Off-on and on-on diagram for 1 compressor …………………………………………..17
Off-on timing ……………………………………………17 on-on and off-off diagram 2 comp………..18
On-on off-off times for 2 comp……………..17
On-on timing…………………………………………….17
Compressor timing:
………………………………………18
Compressors
………………………………………………….15
coming on on the basis of hours of
operation and circuit balancing …….16
coming on on the basis of hours of
operation and circuit saturation ……16
unvaried on sequence with circuit
balancing …………………………………………….17
unvaried on sequence with circuit
saturation ……………………………………………17
Condensation fan
…………………………………………18
Condensation fan control
…………………………….24
Cool mode ………………………………………………..24
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
Heat mode ………………………………………………. 25
Condensation-Defrost probes
…………………….. 19
probe configuration…………………………….. 20
separate or combined condensation .. 20
Configuration of analogue inputs
…………………6
Configuration of digital inputs
………………………8
Configuration of fan outputs
…………………………9
Configuration of outputs
……………………………….9
Configuration parameters
………………………….. 36
Connection diagrams
……………………………………..6
Control during defrost
………………………………… 29
Compressors
…………………………………………….. 29
Fans ………………………………………………………….. 29
Reversing valve
………………………………………… 29
Cooling
………………………………………………………… 21
Copy Card
…………………………………………………5; 14
Cross references
………………………………………………4
current transformer
…………………………………….. 46
Cut-off
…………………………………………………………. 49
D
Defrost
…………………………………………………………. 28 compressor management ………………………. 28
Defrost end
………………………………………………….. 29 diagram ……………………………………………………. 30
Parameter configuration………………………… 29
Defrost parameters
……………………………………… 39
Defrost start
………………………………………………… 28 diagram ……………………………………………………. 29
Setting timer to zero………………………………. 28
Stopping timer………………………………………… 28
Description of Parameters
………………………….. 31
Device off
……………………………………………………… 21
DIAGNOSTICS
……………………………………………… 40
Differential temperature control
………………… 24
Digital alarms
……………………………………………… 45
Digital inputs
………………………………………………….8
Configuration Table…………………………………8 polarity………………………………………………………..8
Polarity table ………………………………………………8
Display
…………………………………………………………. 10
Drip time
……………………………………………………… 29
Dynamic Set point
………………………………………. 21
Control
parameters
………………………………… 22
Modification depending on current input with negative offset……………………………. 22
Modification depending on current input with positive offset……………………………… 22
Modification depending on outdoor temperature with negative offset……… 23
Modification depending on outdoor temperature with positive offset………. 22
50
E
Electrical heater parameters
……………………….38
Electromechanical features
………………………….46
Energy 400
………………………………………………………5
Extension
…………………………………………………………5
Extension parameters
…………………………………..39
F
Fan configuration
…………………………………………18
selection
of output type…………………………..18
Fan control configuration
……………………………18
Fan control in cool mode diagram……………………………………………………..25
Fan control in heat mode diagram……………………………………………………..25
Fan control parameters
……………………………….38
Forbidden use
……………………………………………….47
FUNCTIONS
…………………………………………………..28
G
GLOSSARY
……………………………………………………..49
H
Heating
………………………………………………………….21
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
…………………………4
Hydraulic pump
……………………………………………19
Hydraulic pump control
……………………………….26 diagram……………………………………………………..26
Hysteresis
………………………………………………………49
I
Icons for emphasis:
…………………………………………4
Impulse duration
………………………………………….18
INSTALLATION
……………………………………………….6
Internal fan
…………………………………………………..19
INTRODUCTION
……………………………………………..5
K
Keyboard
……………………………………………………….10
Keyboards
……………………………………………………….5
Keys
……………………………………………………………….10
Mode …………………………………………………………10
L
Led
…………………………………………………………………10
List of alarms
………………………………………………..40
Load control
………………………………………………….23
Loads
……………………………………………………………..49
Low voltage outputs
………………………………………9
M
Manual reset
…………………………………………………49
Menu structure
……………………………………………..13
O
Operating modes
………………………………………….21 configuration table…………………………………..21
OR logico
………………………………………………………49
Outputs
…………………………………………………………..9
P
Parallel electrical heaters
…………………………….27
Param Manager
……………………………………………..5
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
PARAMETERS
………………………………………………. 31
Parameters table
…………………………………………. 36
Permanent memory
…………………………………….. 49
Permitted use
………………………………………………. 47
Phase shift
……………………………………………………. 18
Physical quantities and units of measurement
…………………………………………………………………….9
Pick-up
…………………………………………………………. 18
Power outputs
…………………………………………………9
Configuration table…………………………………….9
Polarity Table……………………………………………9
Power step
……………………………………………………. 15
Programming parameters – Menu levels
…… 11
Pump parameters
……………………………………….. 38
R
Range
…………………………………………………………… 49
Recording hours of operation
…………………….. 28
References
……………………………………………………….4
Regulation algorithm in cool mode
…………… 23
Regulation algorithm in heat mode
………….. 23
Regulations
………………………………………………….. 46
Remote keyboard
………………………………………… 11
Reset
…………………………………………………………….. 49
Reset alarm
………………………………………………….. 49
RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKS
……… 48
Reversing valve
……………………………………………. 19
Reversing valve control
……………………………….. 27
Reversing valves
…………………………………………… 19
S
Safety timing
……………………………………………….. 17
Scroll down
………………………………………………….. 49
Scroll up
………………………………………………………. 49
selection
………………………………………………………….9
Serial Interface (EWTK)
…………………………………..5
Serial outputs
………………………………………………….9
Set Point
………………………………………………………. 49
Setting set points
………………………………………… 21
Stand-by
…………………………………………………21; 49
SUMMARY
………………………………………………………2
Supplementary electrical heaters
………………. 27
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
………………………….. 15
T
Tabella Allarmi
……………………………………………. 41
Technical data
…………………………………………….. 46
TECHNICAL FEATURES
………………………………… 46
TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONS
……… 21
U
Unit of measurement:
…………………………………….9
USE OF THE DEVICE
…………………………………….. 47
USER INTERFACE
…………………………………………. 10
V
Visibility of parameters and submenus
……… 14
W
Wall-mounted keyboard
…………………………….. 11
51
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing
52
Microtech s.r.l.
via dell’Industria, 15
Zona Industriale Paludi
32010 Pieve d’Alpago (BL)
ITALY
Telephone +39 0437 986444
Facsimile +39 0437 986163
Email [email protected]
Internet http:/www.microtech.com
An Invensys company
electronic controller for Chiller/Heat pump up to 4 steps
technical user manual
ENERGY 400 -PRELIMINARY-
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 2
1 SUMMARY
1 SUMMARY …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………22 How to use this manual ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..43 Introduction ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………5
3.1 Components …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 53.1.1 Energy 400 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.2 Extension……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………53.1.3 Keyboards………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….53.1.4 CF (Control Fan) Modules…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.5 Copy Card………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….53.1.6 Serial Interface (EWTK) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.7 Param Manager ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5
4 Installation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..64.1 Connection diagrams…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 64.2 Configuration of analogue inputs ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 64.3 Configuration of digital inputs……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 84.4 Configuration of outputs ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9
4.4.1 Power outputs………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….94.4.2 Low voltage outputs ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..94.4.3 Serial outputs…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..9
4.5 Physical quantities and units of measurement ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9User Interface…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………10
5.1 Keys………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..105.2 Display …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10
5.2.1 Display……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..105.2.2 Led……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10
5.3 Wall-mounted keyboard………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………115.4 Programming parameters – Menu levels……………………………………………………………………………………………………………115.5 Visibility of parameters and submenus………………………………………………………………………………………………………………14
5.5.1 Copy Card……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….14
6 System configuration………………………………………………………………………………………………………..156.1 Compressors ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….156.2 Compressor configuration……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………15
6.2.1 Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….166.2.2 Compressor timing ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..17
6.3 Condensation fan………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….186.3.1 Fan configuration………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..186.3.2 Fan control configuration ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..18
6.4 Reversing valves…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.5 Hydraulic pump…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.6 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters …………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.7 Internal fan……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………196.8 Condensation-Defrost probes……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..19
7 Temperature control functions………………………………………………………………………………………….217.1 Setting set points ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….217.2 Dynamic Set point ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..217.3 Load control ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….23
7.3.1 Compressor control – regulation algorithm ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..237.3.2 Condensation fan control ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..247.3.3 Combined or Separate Condensation………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….267.3.4 Hydraulic pump control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………267.3.5 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..277.3.6 Reversing valve control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..27
8 Functions …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………288.1 Recording hours of operation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………28
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 3
8.2 Defrost …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..288.2.1 Defrost start …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..288.2.2 Control during defrost……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….298.2.3 Defrost end …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….29
9 Parameters ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………319.1 Description of Parameters ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………319.2 Parameters table…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..36
10 Diagnostics ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4010.1 List of alarms…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………40
11 Technical features…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….4611.1 Technical data………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4611.2 Electromechanical features ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….4611.3 Regulations……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………46
12 Use of the device ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4712.1 Permitted use ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..4712.2 Forbidden use………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..47
13 Responsibility and residual risks ………………………………………………………………………………………..4814 Glossary……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………49
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 4
2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUALx
This manual is designed to permit quick, easy reference with the following features:
References column:A column to the left of the text contains references to subjects discussed in the text to help you locate the information youneed quickly and easily.
Cross references:All words written in italics are referenced in the subject index to help you find the page containing details on this subject;supposing you read the following text:”when the alarm is triggered, the compressors will be shut down”The italics mean that you will find a reference to the page on the topic of compressors listed under the item compressorsin the index.If you are consulting the manual “on-line” (using a computer), words which appear in italics are hyperlinks: just click on aword in italics with the mouse to go directly to the part of the manual that discusses this topic.
Some segments of text are marked by icons appearing in the references column with the meanings specified below:
Take note: information on the topic under discussion which the user ought to keep in mind
Tip: a recommendation which may help the user to understand and make use of the information supplied onthe topic under discussion.
Warning! : information which is essential for preventing negative consequences for the system or a hazard topersonnel, instruments, data, etc., and which users MUST read with care.
References
Cross references
Icons foremphasis:
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 5
3 INTRODUCTIONx
Energy 400 is a compact device that permits control of air conditioning units of the following types:• air-air• air-water• water-water• motor-condensing
The controller can manage machines with up to four power steps distributed in a maximum of 2 cooling circuits (forexample, 2 circuits, with 2 compressors per circuit).
Main characteristics:• Outflowing water temperature control• Condensation control• 2 inputs which may be configured for NTC or 4-20mA (through parameters)• 11 configurable digital inputs + (4 four optional)• Dynamic set point• Setting of parameters from the keyboard, with a personal computer or with a interface module• Remote keyboard (100 m) which may be connected up directly without serial interfaces.• 3 4-20 mA outputs• Control of 1, 2, 3, or 4 compressors.
3.1 Components
We will now look at the basic components and accessories in the system and how they are connected.
3.1.1 Energy 400The basic module is an electronic card for connection with I/O resources and a CPU as described in the section onconnection diagrams.
3.1.2 ExtensionThe basic module is an electronic card for connection as described in the section on connection diagrams.
3.1.3 KeyboardsTwo types of keyboard are available:• TS-P: Panel keyboard (32×74)• TS-W: Wall-mounted keyboard
3.1.4 CF (Control Fan) ModulesUsed to connect fans with Energy 400 low voltage outputs.
3.1.5 Copy CardCan be used to upload and download the Energy 400 parameter map.
3.1.6 Serial Interface (EWTK)A device which permits the controller to interface with a Personal Computer
It must be connected up as illustrated in the figure
The PC must be connected with the interface module, and the interface module with the device, with no poweron to any of the devices, and in compliance with current safetyregulations . Be careful to avoid electrostaticshocks, especially on exposed metal parts of the devices; allow electrostatic shocks to discharge into the groundbefore handling.
3.1.7 Param ManagerIf you have an adequate Personal Computer with Windows 95 or a more recent operating system, the Param Managersoftware, an adequate interface module and proper wiring, you can have full control over all Energy 400 parameters viaPersonal Computer.The instrument can be programmed easily and quickly using a series of interfaces which permit a logical, guided approach.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 6
4 INSTALLATIONx
Before proceeding with any operation, first make sure that you have connected up the power supply to thedevice through an appropriate external current trransformer.Always follow these rules when connecting boards to one another and to the application:Never apply loads which exceed the limits set forth in these specifications to outputs;Always comply with connection diagrams when connecting up loads;To prevent electrical couplings, always wire low voltage loads separately from high voltage loads;
4.1 Connection diagrams
Basic module
Detail of connectors
Instrument configuration is determined by the values of the parameters associated with inputs and outputs.
4.2 Configuration of analogue inputs
There are 6 analogue inputs:• 4 NTC transducers,• 2 configurable NTC/4-20mA transducers.
Analogue inputs
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 7
The following devices shall henceforth be referred to by the codes ST1….ST4:ST1 – Temperature control probe: inflowing water or air, reading range : -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST2 – Configurable probe, reading range: -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST3 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mAST4 — Configurable probe, reading range : -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST5 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mAST6 — Configurable probe, reading range: -30°C ÷ 90°C;
4 analogue inputs are available on the extension which is not used in this release.The resolution of NTC analogue inputs is one tenth of a Kelvin degree;They are precise to within 0.8°C within the range of 0÷35°C and to within 0.8°C ÷ 3°C in the remainder of the scale.The 4-20mA input is precise to within 1% FS, with a resolution of one tenth of a Kelvin degree, if the input is configured asa dynamic set point, or Kpa*10 if the input is configured as a pressure probe.
ST1-ST6 probes can be configured according to the following table:
Value Pa. Description 0 1 2 3 4 5
H11 Configuration ofanalogue inputST1
Probeabsent
NTC input inflowingwater or air
Digital inputrequest forheating
Digital inputrequest fortemperaturecontrol
DifferentialNTC input
Not permitted
H12 Configuration ofanalogue inputST2
Probeabsent
NTC inputoutflowingwater/air,anti-freeze
Digital inputrequest forcooling
Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted
H13 Configuration ofanalogue inputST3
Probeabsent
NTC inputcondensation
4…20 mAcondensationinput
4…20 mAinput fordynamic setpoint
NTCantifreeze forwater-watergas reversalmachines
NTC heatingcontrol forwater-waterwater reversalmachines
H14 Configuration ofanalogue inputST4
Probeabsent
NTC inputcondensation
Multifunctional digital input
NTC input foroutdoortemperature
Not permitted Not permitted
H15 Configuration ofanalogue inputST5
Probeabsent
NTC inputoutflowingwater/air
Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted
H16 Configuration ofanalogue inputST6
Probeabsent
NTC inputcondensationcircuit 2
4-20mA inputcondensation
Not permitted Antifreezeinput forwater-watergas reversalmachines
Not permitted
If inputs ST3 and ST6 are defined as 4-20mA inputs under pressure, the scale bottom value of the pressure input is alsosignificant:Pa H17= Maximum input value; set the corresponding value to a current of 20 mA
Analogue inputs:resolution and
precision
Analogue inputs:configuration
table
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 8
4.3 Configuration of digital inputs
There are 11 voltage-free digital inputs, which will henceforth be identified as ID1….ID11.ST1, ST2, and ST4 may be added to these if they are configured as digital inputs (through parameters Pa H11, Pa H12, PaH14). 4 more digital inputs are available on the extension.
The polarity of digital inputs is determined by the parameters listed below:ID1, ID2, ID3, ID4 defined by parameter Pa H18,ID5, ID6, ID7, ID8 defined by parameter Pa H19ID9, ID10, ID11, ST4 (if configured as digital) defined by parameter Pa H20ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15 on extension defined by parameter Pa N01
ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8ID9 ID10 ID11 ST4
Pa H18Pa H19Pa H20Pa H21 ID12 ID13 ID14 ID15
0 Closed Closed Closed Closed1 Open Closed Closed Closed2 Closed Open Closed Closed3 Open Open Closed Closed4 Closed Closed Open Closed5 Open Closed Open Closed6 Closed Open Open Closed7 Open Open Open Closed8 Closed Closed Closed Open9 Open Closed Closed Open10 Closed Open Closed Open11 Open Open Closed Open12 Closed Closed Open Open13 Open Closed Open Open14 Closed Open Open Open15 Open Open Open Open
Example: A value of “10” for parameter Pa H18 indicates that digital inputs ID1 and ID3 are active when their contacts areclosed and digital inputs ID2 and ID4 are active when their contacts are open:
Pa H18 ID1 ID2 ID3 ID410 Closed Open Closed Open
If ST1 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter Pa H21If ST2 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter Pa H22
Parameter Value Description
0 Active if closed1 Active if open
All digital inputs are configurable and may be given the meanings listed below by setting parameters Pa H23 through PaH34 and Pa N02 through Pa N05
Parameter Value Description
0 Input disabled1 Flow switch2 Remote OFF3 Remote Heat/Cool4 Thermal switch compressor 15 Thermal switch compressor 26 Thermal switch compressor 37 Thermal switch compressor 48 Thermal switch fan circuit 19 Thermal switch fan circuit 210 High pressure circuit 111 High pressure circuit 212 Low pressure circuit 113 Low pressure circuit 214 High pressure compressor 115 High pressure compressor 216 High pressure compressor 317 High pressure compressor 418 End of defrost circuit 119 End of defrost circuit 2
In the case of multiple inputs configured with the same value, the function associated with the input will carry out aLogical OR among the inputs.
Digital inputs
Digital inputs:polarity
Digital inputs:Polarity table
Digital inputs:Configuration
Table
Outputs
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 9
4.4 Configuration of outputs
There are two basic types of outputs: power outputs, and low voltage outputs.
4.4.1 Power outputsThere are 8 power outputs, which shall henceforth be referred to as RL1…RL8 (relays).RL1 — compressor 1, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL2 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL3 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL4 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL5 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL6 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL7 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL8 – cumulative alarm, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
There are 2 additional digital outputs in the extension module:RL9 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL10 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
Configurable outputs may be given the following meanings by setting parameters Pa H35 through Pa H40 and Pa N06through Pa N07
Value Description0 Disabled1 Reversal valve circuit 12 Reversal valve circuit 23 Condenser fan circuit 14 Condenser fan circuit 25 Electrical heater 16 Electrical heater 27 Pump8 Evaporator fan9 Power Step 210 Power Step 311 Power Step 4
Polarity of RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5,RL8 may be selected using Pa H41-Pa H45
Parameter Value Description
0 Relay closed if output active1 Relay open if output not active
If multiple outputs are configured with the same resource, the outputs will be activated in parallel.
4.4.2 Low voltage outputsThere are a total of 4 low voltage outputs available: 2 phase cut outputs and 2 4-20 mA outputs:TK1 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 1.TK2 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 2.AN1 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 1AN2 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 2
Outputs AN1 and AN2, though their connections are physically separate, are alternatives to outputs TK1 and TK2 which areselected by parameters Pa H45 and Pa H46
Fan config. parameter Index Value 0 Value 1
Fan 1 output H45 Fan 1 output in phase cut Fan 1 output in 4-20 mAFan 2 output H46 Fan 2 output in phase cut Fan 2 output in 4-20 mA
4.4.3 Serial outputsThere are 2 asynchronous serials on the control:• channel for serial communication with a personal computer through a Microtech interface module• channel for serial communication with a standard Microtech keyboard. Power supply 12 VDC (2400,e,8,1).
4.5 Physical quantities and units of measurement
Parameter Pa H64 may be used to set temperature display in either degrees °C or degrees °F:
Pa H64 Unit ofmeasurement
0 Degrees °C1 Degrees °F
Configurationtable
Polarity Table
Configuration offan outputs
Unit ofmeasurement:
selection
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 10
5 USER INTERFACEx
The interface on the front panel of the instrument can be used to carry out all the operations connected to the use of theinstrument, and in particular to:• Set operating mode• Respond to alarm situations• Check the state of resources
Front panel of the instrument
The instrument can function without the aid of a keyboard
5.1 Keys
Selects operating mode:
If the heating mode is enabled, each time the key is pressed the following sequence occurs:Stand-by -àà cooling àà heating àà stand-by
if heating mode is not enabled:Stand-by àà cooling àà stand-by
In menu mode, this key acts as a SCROLL UP or UP key (increasing value).
Resets alarms, and turns the instrument on and off.
Press once to reset all manually reset alarms not currently active; all the alarm events per hour will also be reset even if thealarms are not active.Hold down the key for 2 seconds to turn the instrument from on to off or vice versa. When it is off, only the decimal pointremains on the display. In menu mode this key acts as a SCROLL DOWN or DOWN key (decreasing value).
Pressing the “mode” and “on-off” keys at the same time:
If you press both keys at the same time and then release within 2 seconds, you will move one level deeper in the displaymenu.If you press both keys for more than 2 seconds you will move one level up.If you are currently viewing the lowest level in the menu and you press both keys and release within 2 seconds, you will goup one level.
5.2 Display
The device can communicate information of all kinds on its status, configuration, and alarms through a display and anumber of leds on its front panel.
5.2.1 DisplayNormal display shows:• regulation temperature in tenths of degrees celsius or fahrenheit• the alarm code, if at least one alarm is active. If multiple alarms are active, the one with greater priority will be
displayed, according to the Table of Alarms.• If temperature control is not analogue and depends on the status of a digital input (ST1 or ST2 configured as digital
inputs), the “On” or “Off” label will be displayed, depending on whenther temperature control is active or not.• When in menu mode, the display depends on the current position; labels and codes are used to help the user identify
the current function.
5.2.2 LedLed 1 compressore 1.ON if compressor 1 is active• OFF if compressor 1 if off• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if compressor is currently set to defrost
Power step 2 ledON if power step 2 is active
Keyboard
Mode
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 11
• OFF if power step 2 is not active• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if step 2 is currently defrosting
Led step 3 di potenzaON se lo step 3 di potenza è attivo• OFF se lo step 3 di potenza non è attivo• BLINK veloce se sono in corso temporizzazioni di sicurezza• BLINK lento se step 3 in sbrinamento
Power step 4 led• ON if power step 4 is active• OFF if power step 4 is not active• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if step 4 is defrosting
Electrical heater/boiler led• ON if at least one internal anti-freeze electrical heater or boiler is enabled• OFF if both are off
Heating Led• ON if the device is in heating mode.
Cooling Led• ON if the controller is in cooling mode
If neither the HEATING led nor the COOLING led are in, the controller is in STAND-BY mode.When it is off, only the decimal point appears on the display .
5.3 Wall-mounted keyboard
The remote keyboard a on the display is an exact copy of the information displayed on the instrument, with the same leds;Remote keyboard
It performs exactly the same functions as those described in the display section.The only difference is in use of the UP and DOWN keys (to increase and decrease value), which are separate from theMODE and ON/OFF keys.
5.4 Programming parameters – Menu levels
Device parameters may be modified using a Personal Computer (with the required software, interface key and cables), orusing the keyboard;If using the keyboard, access to parameters is arranged in a hierarchy of levels which may be accessed by pressing the“mode and “on-off” keys at the same time (as described above).Each menu level is identified by a mnemonic code which appears on the display.The structure is set up as shown in the diagram below:
Remote keyboard
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 13
Menu structure
Control probeCurrent alarm
Set point:
Analogue Inp.:
Alarms:
Digital input:
Op. hours:
Password:
Parameters:
Label cooling set:
Label heating set:
Input code.: —
Current alarms Code:
Input code: —
Value heating set
Value cooling set
Configuration par.:
Compressor par.:
Fan control par.:
Alarms par.:
Pump par.:
Antifreeze par.:
Defrost par.:
Par. index —
Parameter value
Number of hours par.
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Comp. hours: —
Password value
Status of digital input
Val. analogue input
Par. index —
Par. index —
Par. index —
Par. index —
Par. index —
Par. index —
Pump hours: Number of hours par.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 14
5.5 Visibility of parameters and submenus
With a personal computer, interface key, suitable cables and the “Param Manager” software, it is possible to restrict thevisibility and modification of parameters and entire submenus.A “visibility value” may be assigned to each parameter, as described below:
Value Meaning0003 Parameter or label visible at all times0258 Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password = Pa
H46)0770 Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password = Pa
H46). Parameter cannot be modified.0768 Parameter visible from PC only.
Some visibility settings are factory set.For more information, please refer to the “ Param Manager” instructions.
5.5.1 Copy Card
The copy card can store the whole map of Energy 400 parameters;To download the map present in the copy card, proceed as follows:1. Connect the key to the appropriate Energy 400 output (refer to connection diagrams) while the device is off.2. Turn on the Energy 400 : the parameters map in the copy card will be copied to the Energy 400.
To store the Energy 400 parameters map in memory, proceed as follows:1. Connect the copy card to the appropriate Energy 400 output (refer to connection diagrams) while the device is on.2. From the keyboard, access the “password” submenu (refer to menu structure) and set the value contained in
parameter Pa H46: The instrument’s map will be downloaded to the copy card.3. Disconnect the copy card when finished.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 15
6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONx
In this section we will look at how to configure parameters for various loads on the basis of the type of installation to becontrolled.
6.1 Compressors
Energy 400 can control systems consisting of up to two cooling circuits with 1 to 4 compressors.If there is a capacity step, it will be considered as a compressor.Each compressor is piloted by a device relay (power outputs) (each capacity step requires an additional output).The first compressor must be connected to output RL1; the remaining outputs (RL2…RL7) (RL9…RL10 on extension) may beassigned at will, setting the value of the parameters Pa H35 …. PaH40 (Pa N06 … Pa N07 if there is no extension).The compressors will be turned on or off depending on the temperatures detected and the temperature control functionsthat have been set (refer to the section on Compressor controls – Regulation algorithml )
6.2 Compressor configuration
The turning on of an additional compressor (or capacity step) will henceforth be referred to as a Power step (power level).
The following configurations are available for compressors without capacity steps:
Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1) 2 (Pa H06=2) 3 (Pa H06=3) 4 (Pa H06=4)
1(Pa
H05=1)
RL1=comp. 1 circ.1 RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2circ.1Step3 = comp 3circ.1
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1Step3 = comp 3 circ.1Step4 = comp 4 circ.1
Num
ber o
f circ
uits
2(Pa
H05=2)
RL1=Comp. 1 circ.1Step3 = comp. 1 circ.2
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1Step3 = comp 1 circ.2Step4 = comp 2 circ.2
Configuration error Configuration error
The following configurations are available for compressors with 1 capacity step (Pa H07=1):
Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1) 2 (Pa H06=2)
1(Pa
H05=1)
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1Step3 = comp.2 circ.1Step4 = cap. step1 Comp.2 circ.1
Num
ber o
f circ
uits
2(Pa
H05=2)
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step3 = comp.1 circ.2Step4 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.2
Configuration error
The following configurations are available for compressors with 2 or 3 capacity steps (Pa H07=2 or Pa H07=3):
Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1 and Pa H07=2) 2 (Pa H06=2 and Pa H07=3)
1(Pa
H05=1)
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step4 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step3 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1Step4 = cap. step3 comp.1 circ.1
Num
bero
of c
ircui
ts
2(pa
H05=2)
Configuration error Configuration error
Power step
Simplecompressors
with 1 capacitystep
with 2 or 3capacity steps
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 16
6.2.1 Compressor (or power step) on/off sequencesDepending on the temperature conditions detected by the probes, the temperature control functions of the “Energy 400”may request turning on and off of compressors/capacity steps (power steps).The sequence in which compressors/capacity steps (steps) are turned on and off may be determined by adjusting thevalues of parameters Pa H08 and Pa H09 as described below:
Parameter valuePar Description 0 1
Pa H08 Power step on sequence Depends on number of hours ofoperation
Unvaried on sequence
Pa H09 Circuit balacing Circuit saturation Circuit balancing
When on sequences depend on the number of hours of operation, of 2 available compressors, the one which has beenoperated for less hours will come on first, and the one which has been operated for more hours will always go off first. Inan unvaried on sequence, the compressor with the lower number will always come on first (compressor 1 beforecompressor 2) and the compressor with the higher number will always go off first.
The circuit balancing parameter is significant only if there are 2 circuits and 2 steps per circuit. If we select H09=0, allpower steps in one circuit will come on before those in the other circuit. If H09=1 (balancing), power steps will come on insuch a way that both circuits are delivering the same power, or the difference is no more than one step.
Let us take a closer look at the various combinations:
Pa H08=0 Pa H09=0CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER
CIRCUIT:CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUIT:
The compressor with the least hours of operation comes onfirst, then the capacity step for the same circuit, thecompressor on the other circuit, and, lastly, its capacity step.When turning off, the capacity step of the compressor withthe most hours of operation goes off first, then thecorresponding compressor, then the other capacity step andfinally the other compressor.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2Ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep4ààRL1ààStep2and go off in this orderStep2ààRL1ààStep4ààStep3
If all compressors are off to start with, the circuit which hasthe lower average number of hours for all its compressorswill come on first. In this circuit the compressor with theleast hours of operation will come on first, followed by theother compressor in the same circuit: thus the circuit issaturated. The next step is chosen between the twocompressors in the other circuit with fewer hours.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2Ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2hours comp.4 > hours comp.3(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 +hours comp.3)/2 they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep4ààStep2ààRL1and go off in this orderRL1ààStep2ààStep4ààStep3
Pa H08=0 and Pa H09=1CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER
CIRCUIT:CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUIT
The compressor with the least hours of operation comes onfirst, followed by the compressor in the other circuit, thecapacity step of the first circuit to come on, and, lastly, theother capacity step. When going off, the capacity step of thecompressor with the most hours goes off first, followed bythe capacity step of the other compressor, the compressorwith the most hours and, lastly, the remaining compressor.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2they will come on in this orderStep3ààRL1ààStep4ààStep2and go off in this orderStep2ààStep4ààRL1ààStep3
If all compressors are off to start with, the circuit with thelower average number of hours for its compressors will comeon first. The average is calculated as the ratio between thetotal number of hours of the compressors available and thenumber of compressors in the circuit. In this circuit, thecompressor with the least hours will come on first, then thecompressor in the other circuit with the least hours, theother compressor in the first circuit and, lastly, theremaining compressor.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as followsRL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2hours comp.4 > hours comp.3(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 +hours comp.3)/2 they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep2ààStep4ààRL1and go off in this orderRL1ààStep4ààStep2ààStep3
Compressors:coming on on thebasis of hours of
operation andcircuit saturation
Compressors:coming on on thebasis of hours of
operation andcircuit balancing
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 17
Pa H08=1 and Pa H09=0CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUITThe compressor con with the lower number comes on first,then its capacity step, then the compressor in the othercircuit and, lastly, its capacity step. The capacity step for thecompressor with the highest number is the first to go off,followed by the capacity step of the other compressor, andfinally the compressor.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2they will come on in this orderRL1ààStep2ààStep3ààStep4and go off in this orderStep4ààStep3ààStep2ààRL1
Exactly the same as the first case.
Pa H08=1 e Pa H09=1CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUITThe compressor with the lowest number comes on first,then the compressor in the other circuit, the capacity stepof the first compressor and then the capacity step of thesecond compressor. They go off in reverse order.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2they will come on in this orderRL1ààStep3ààStep2ààStep4and go off in this orderStep4ààStep2ààStep3ààRL1
Exactly the same as the first case.
In the unvaried sequence, if the compressor with the lower number is unavailable, the compressor with the higher numbercomes on.If the compressor comes available and the amount of power required is equal to the amount of power being delivered,the machine will continue to function in its current state: it will not turn off a compressor with a higher number to turn ona compressor with a lower number.
A compressor is unavailable when it is shut down due to an alarm or is currently counting safety timing.
6.2.2 Compressor timingThe turning on and off of compressors must comply with safety times which may be set by the user using the parametersspecified below:
There is a safety interval between the time a compressor goes off and the time the same compressor comes back on(compressor on…off safety time, controlled by parameter Pa C01);This interval of time must elapse when the “Energy 400” is turned on.
There is a safety interval between the time a compressor is turned on and the time it is turned on again (compressoron…on safety time, controlled by parameter Pa C02) .
If the machine has multiple power steps, there are intervals of time which must pass between turning on of 2 compressors(Pa C06) and turning off of 2 compressors (Pa C07). An amount of time determined by parameter Pa C08 (capacity step ondelay) must elapse between the turning on of one compressor or capacity step and the turning on of any other
Compressors:unvaried on
sequence withcircuit saturation
Compressors:unvaried on
sequence withcircuit balancing
Safety timing
Off-on timing
On-on timing
Off-on and on-ondiagram for 1
compressor
On-on off-offtimes for 2 comp.
Compressor
ON
OFF
OFF – ON safety timePa C01
Seconds*10
ON – ON safety timePa C02
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 18
compressor or capacity step on the machine. The greatest of the currently active safety times must be applied to eachcompressor.The off time interval between compressors is not applied in the event of a compressor shutdown alarm, in which casethey stop immediately.
6.3 Condensation fan
“Energy 400” may be connected with two types of fan piloting unit:
• Triak• 4-20 mA
6.3.1 Fan configurationFirst of all, correctly configure the type of analogue output (low voltage outputs) to which the fan control module(s) areconnected;the relevant parameters are Pa H45 for the first circuit and Pa H46 for the second circuit, as shown in the table below:
Parameter value Circuit 1 – Pa H45 Circuit 2 – Pa H460 TK output enabled for phase
cutTK output enabled for phasecut
1 Enable 4-20 mA output AN1 Enable 4-20 mA output AN2
If the output is configured as a proportional triac, the parameters PICK-UP, PHASE SHIFT, and IMPULSE DURATION are alsosignificant.
Every time the external fan is started up, power is supplied to the exchanger fan at maximum voltage, and the fan operatesat maximum speed, for an amount of time equal to Pa F02 seconds; after this time the fan operates at the speed set bythe regulator.Pa F02 = Fan pick-up time (seconds)
Determines a delay during which it is possible to compensate the different electrical characteristics of the fan drivemotors:Pa F03 = duration of fan phase shift expressed as a percentage.
Determines the duration of the TK output piloting impulse in microseconds*10Pa F04= triak piloting impulse duration
6.3.2 Fan control configurationThe fan control may be configured to supply a proportionate output (0-100%) or to function as “ON OFF” by setting thevalue of the parameter Pa F01:
Pa F01 = Selection of control output typePa F01 = 0 proportionate fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on
parameters)Pa F01 = 1 fan “on-off” output; in this mode the control performs the same
calculations as in proportionate output, but if the outcome isgreater than 0, the control output will be 100.
Pa F01 = 2 on-off operation as called by compressor. In this mode output is 0if no compressor is on in the circuit, or 100% if at least onecompressor in the circuit is on
on-on and off-offdiagram 2 comp
Pick-up
Phase shift
Impulse duration
Fan configuration:selection ofoutput type
Comp.1
ON
OFF
Interval betweenturning offcompressors Pa C07
Seconds
Interval between turning oncompressors Pa C05
Comp.2ON
OFF
Seconds
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 19
If some of the relays are configured as condensation fan outputs (Pa H35- Pa H40 and Pa N06- Pa N07=3 or 4), they willbe on if the control output for each fan is greater than 0; otherwise, they will be off.
6.4 Reversing valves
The reversing valve is used only when operating in “heat pump” mode.“Energy 400” can control up to 2 reversing valves in a dual circuit system.
The reversing valve in circuit 1 is active only if:• a relay (power output) is configured as reversing valve for circuit 1 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 1).
The reversing valve in circuit 2 is active only if:• a relay (power output) is configured as reversing valve for circuit 2 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 2)• there are 2 circuits
Both of them will be active only ifthe heat pump is in operation (Pa H10=1 )
6.5 Hydraulic pump
The hydraulic pump is active only if at least one relay (power output) is configured as pump output (Pa H35-Pa H40 or PaN06-Pa N07= 7 ) .
The pump may be configured to function independently of the compressor or whenever called up using parameter Pa P01 :
Pa P01 = Pump operating mode0=continuous operation1=operation when called up by regulation algorithm
with a flow switch alarm (table of alarms) which is active with automatic reset, the pump will be on even if the compressisoff.
6.6 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters
“Energy 400” can control up to 2 anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters.
The electrical heater output is active only if the relays (power outputs) are configured as electrical heaters 1 or 2 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06-Pa N07= 5 or 6) .If configured in this way, the outputs will command the electrical heater to come on or go off, depending on theparameters of configuration of electrical heaters Pa R01 … Pa R06, as described below:
ValueParameter Description0 1
Pa R01 Defrost configuration comes on only when requested bycontrol
always on during defrost
Pa R02 Cooling modeconfiguration
off during cooling on during cooling (depending on anti-freeze electrical heater control)
Pa R03 Heating modeconfiguration
off during heating on during heating (depending on anti-freeze electrical heater control)
Pa R06 OFF or STAND-BYconfiguration
off when OFF or on STAND-BY Electrical heaters on when OFF or onSTAND-BY
Parameters r04 and r05 determine which probe the electrical heaters will control.Each of the two electrical heaters may be set to any one of probes ST1, ST2 or ST5.If the is absent or configured as a digital input, the electrical heaters will always be off.
Pa r04 configuration probe set to electrical heater 1Pa r05 configuration probe set to electrical heater 2
ValueParameters
Description
0 Electrical heater off1 Set to ST12 Set to ST23 Set to ST5
6.7 Internal fan
The fan output will be active only if one relay is configured as evaporator fan output.The output is ON if at least one compressor is ON; otherwise it is off. During defrost the output is always off.
6.8 Condensation-Defrost probes
“Energy 400” can control defrosting of one or more circuits depending on system configuration.
Defrost is enabled if:• stated by the “Enable defrost” parameter (Pa d01 = 1)
Reversing valve
configuration
probeconfiguration
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 20
• the condensation probe for circuit 1 is present (connected to analogue input ST3) and the relative parameter Pa H13= 1 (in the case of an NTC probe) or Pa H13 = 2 (in the case of a 4-20mA probe) and ST4 = 1
• the reversing valve is present
In the case of a dual circuit system, defrost may be separate or combined (this will be the case of a system with a singlecondenser) depending on the setting of the parameterPa F22 : condensation type
0 1Pa F22: condensation type Separate condensers Combined condensation
Defrost end and start depends on the values of the condensation probes, which may be configured as follows:
Let SCC1 be the condensation probe of circuit 1; it may be connected to analogue input ST3 or ST4;depending on the type of probe, the configuration will be as shown in the table below:
Probe connectionProbe type Probe connected to
ST3Probe connected toST4
SCC1 NTC type Pa H13 = 1 Pa H14 = 1SCC1 4-20mA type Pa H13 = 2 —
The following table applies to a dual circuit system:
1 circuit 2 circuits, separatedefrost
2 circuits, combineddefrost (*)
Defrost circuit 1 SCC1 SCC1 MIN(SCC1;ST6)Defrost circuit 2 — ST6 MIN(SCC1;ST6)
(*) If A and B are control probes, MIN(A;B) representsthe smaller of A and B, if A and B are declared present.It will be value A if B is not declared present.It is impossible for A not to be declared present.
separate orcombined
condensation
probeconfiguration
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 21
7 TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONSx
Once ”Energy 400” has been configured, loads may be controlled on the basis of temperature and pressure conditionsdetected by probes and temperature control functions which may be defined using the appropriate parameters.
There are 4 possible operating modes:• cooling• heating• stand-by• off
Cooling: this is the “summer” operating mode; the machine is configured for cooling.
Heating: this is the “winter” operating mode; the machine is configured for heating.
Stand-by: the machine does not govern any temperature control function; it continues to signal alarms
Off: machine is turned off.
The operating mode is determined by settings entered on the keyboard and by the following
Parameters:Configuration parameter ST1 (Pa H11) ( refer to Analogue inputs: configuration table)Configuration parameter ST2 (Pa H12) ( refer to Analogue inputs: configuration table)Operating mode selection parameter (Pa H49)Heat pump parameter (Pa H10 )
Operating mode selection parameter (Pa H49)0= Selection from keyboard1= Selection from digital input (refer to digital inputs)
Heat pump parameter (Pa H10)0 = Heat pump not present1 = Heat pump present
Combinations of these parameters will generate the following rules:
Operating mode Mode selectionparameterPa H49
Configurationparameter ST1Pa H11
Configurationparameter ST2Pa H12
Mode selection from keyboard 0 Other than 2 Other than 2Mode selection from digital input. 1 Other than 2 Other than 2If input ST1 is on, operating mode is heating; ifnot, stand-by
Any 2 Other than 2
If input ST2 is on, operating mode is cooling; ifnot, stand-by
Any Other than 2 2
If input ST1 is on, operating mode is heating; ifinput ST2 is on, operating mode is cooling; if ST1and ST2 are both on, there is a control error; ifneither is on, operating mode is stand-by
Any 2 2
7.1 Setting set points
Unless the machine is configured as a motor condenser, loads will come on and go off dynamically depending on thetemperature control functions set, the temperature/pressure values detected by the probes, and the set points that havebeen set:
There are two set point values:Cooling Set point: this is the set point used as a reference when the device is in cooling modeHeating Set point: this is the set point used as a reference when the device is in heating mode
The set points may be modified from the keyboard by accessing the “SET” submenu (refer to menu structure).
Their values must fall within a range determined by parameters Pa H02 – Pa H01 (Heating) and Pa H04 – Pa H03 (Cooling).
7.2 Dynamic Set point
The regulation algorithm may be used to modify the set point automatically on the basis of outdoor conditions.This modification is achieved by adding a positive or negative offset value to the set point, depending on:• 4-20 mA analogue input (proportionate to a signal set by the user)or• temperature of outdoor probe
This function has two purposes: to save energy, or to operate the machine under particularly harsh outdoor temperatureconditions.
The dynamic set point is active if:• Activation parameter Pa H50 = 1
Operating modes
Cooling
Heating
Stand-by
Device off
Operating modes:configuration
table
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 22
• Probe ST3 (analogue inputs) is configured as a dynamic set point input (Pa H13 = 3) or probe ST4 (analogue inputs) isconfigured as an outdoor probe (Pa H14 = 3)
Parameters for control of the dynamic set point:• Pa H51= max. offset during cooling.• Pa H52= max. offset during heating• Pa H53= Outdoor temperature set point during cooling• Pa H54= Outdoor temperature set point during heating• Pa H55= Delta of cooling temperature• Pa H56= Delta of heating temperature
The interaction of these parameters is illustrated in the graphs below:
Positive Offset (H32>0 or H33>0)
Negative Offset (H32<0 or H33<0)
Positive Offset
Controlparameters
Modificationdepending on
current input withpositive offset
Modificationdepending on
current input withnegative offset
Modificationdepending on
outdoortemperature with
positive offset
OffsetSet point
Current20 mA4 mA
Maxoffset
Current
20 mA4 mA
Maxoffset
Temp.
Delta <0
Outdoor temp. setpoint (H53 orH54)
Delta >0
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 23
Offset Negativo
7.3 Load control
We will now look at how to set parameters for load control on the basis of temperature/pressure conditions detected byprobes.
7.3.1 Compressor control – regulation algorithmThe regulation algorithm calculates the load to be supplied through the compressors for both heating and cooling.
REGULATION ALGORITHM IN COOL MODEIf probe ST2 (analogue inputs) is not configured as a digital input for requests for cooling (Pa H11=2) or probeST1(analogue inputs) as a digital input for regulation algorithm requests (Pa H12=3), compressor management willdepend on ambient temperature and a SET POINT.
ST1 = temperature of inflowing water or inlet airSET COOL= cooling set point set from keyboard.Pa C03 = hysteresis of cooling thermostatPa C05 = delta of power step intervention
If Pa H011 = 3, the power step requested will depend on the status of input ST1 (analogue inputs).If Pa H012 = 2, the power step requested will depend on the status of input ST2 (analogue inputs).If probe ST5 (analogue inputs) is configured as a second step request (Pa H15 =2), the second step (power step) will berequested on the basis of this input. This function will be active only if either Pa H11=3 or Pa H12=2.Only motor condensers may be controlled, up to 2 steps only.
REGULATION ALGORITHM IN HEAT MODEIf probe ST1(analogue inputs) is not configured as a digital input for requests for heat (Pa H05=2) or digital input forrequests for regulation algorithm (Pa H05=3), compressor management will depend on• temperature ST3 (analogue inputs), if configuration parameter ST3 = 5 (for water/water manual reversal machines)• otherwise, temperature ST1(analogue inputs)• a HEATING set point which may be set from the keyboard
ST1/ST3 =Temperature of inflowing water or inlet air
Modificationdepending on
outdoortemperature with
negative offset
Regulationalgorithm in cool
mode
Cooling diagram
Regulationalgorithm in heat
mode
Temp.
Delta <0
Outdoor temp. setpoint. (H53 orH54)
Delta >0
Power
1st step
ST1Pa C03 Pa C03
2nd step
Pa C05 Pa C05 Pa C05
Pa C03 Pa C03
3rd step
4th step
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 24
HEATING SET = Heating set point that has been setPa C04 = Heating thermostat hysteresisPa C05 = Delta of step intervention
If Pa H11 = 2-3, the compressors will be turned off and on depending on the status of input ST1.If probe ST5 (analogue inputs) is configured as a second step request (Pa H15 =2), the second step (power step) will berequested depending on this input. This function will be active only if Pa H11=2,3 or Pa H12=2.
DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLThis function may be used to control temperature according to both ST1(analogue inputs) and ST4 (analogue inputs). Thefunction will be active• if ST1 is configured as differential NTC input (Pa H11 = 4)• if ST4 is configured as outdoor temperature input (Pa H14 = 3)
In this case, the controller will not control on the basis of ST1, but on the basis of the difference between ST1-ST4; ifconfiguration parameter ST3 is equal to 5 (for water/water machines with manual reversal) in heating mode the controllerwill always control on the basis of ST3.Differential temperature control can be used, for instance, to maintain a constant difference in temperature between theoutdoor environment and a liquid being heated or cooled.
A compressor will always be off if:• It is not associated with a relay (power output)• The compressor has been shut down (refer to table of alarms)• Safety timing is in progress• The time lapse between pump on and compressor on is in progress (safety timing)• Preventilation is in progress in cooling mode• Energy 400 is in stand-by or off mode• The parameter for configuration of probe ST1 Pa H11 = 0 (probe absent)
7.3.2 Condensation fan controlCondensation control is dependent on the condensation temperature or pressure for the circuit.Fan control will be on if:• at least one probe per circuit is configured as a condensation probe (pressure or temperature); if not, the fan for the
circuit will come ON and go OFF in response to the circuit compressors.
Fan control may be independent of the compressor, or it may be carried out in response to requests from compressors;Operating mode is determined by parameter Pa F05:
Value0 1
Pa F05:fan output mode
if all compressors in the circuit are off,the fan is off
condensation control is independentof the compressor
The cut-off is bypassed for an amount of time equal to Pa F12 after the compressor is turned on. If the control requestscut-off during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.
If parameter Pa F05 is set to 1, condensation control will be dependent on condensation temperature or pressure,depending on how the following parameters are set:
CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL IN COOL MODEPa F06 = Minimum fan speed in COOL mode;Pa F07 = Maximum silent fan speed in COOL modePa F08 = Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in COOL modePa F09 = Fan prop. band in COOL mode
Heating diagram
Differentialtemperature control
Cool mode
Power
1st step
Pa C03 Pa C03
2nd step
Pa C05 Pa C05
Pa C03 Pa C03
3rd step
4th step
ST1/ST3
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 25
Pa F10 = Fan cut-off deltaPa F11 = Cut-off hysteresis.Pa F13 = Maximum fan speed in COOL modePa F14 = Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in COOL modeAn example of interaction of these parameters is shown in the figure below:
Fan control in cool mode
In cooling mode only, if Pa F05= 0 (if the compressor is turned off the fan is off), parameter Pa F21 (preventilation timefor outdoor fan) is active.Before turning on the compressors in the circuit the fan must be turned on for an amount of time equal to Pa F25; fanspeed is proportionate to condensation temperature, but if the control requests cut-off during this time period the fan willrun at the minimum speed setting.
This parameter prevents the compressor from starting up with a condensation temperature that is too high.
CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL IN HEAT MODEPa F15 = Minimum fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F16 = Maximum silent fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F17 = Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in HEAT mode;Pa F18 = Fan prop. band in HEAT mode;Pa F10 = Fan cut-off delta;Pa F11 = Cut-off hysteresis;Pa F19 = Maximum fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F20 = Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in HEAT mode.An example of interaction of these parameters is shown in the figure below:
Fan control in heat mode
Fan control in coolmode: diagram
Heat mode
Fan control inheat mode:
diagram
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 26
If circuit is in defrost mode, the fan is OFF.
The cut-off is bypassed for an amount of time equal to Pa F12 after the compressor is turned on. If the control requests cut-off during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.
The fan will always be off if: there is an alarm indicating that a condensation fan has shut down (refer to table of alarms).Energy 400 is on stand-by or off.
7.3.3 Combined or Separate CondensationParameter Pa F22 may be used to configure a dual circuit machine with a combined condenser.
Value0 1
Pa F22:condensation type
separate condensers combined condenser
If Pa F22 = 0 the two fans are independent and are controlled by condensation pressure/temperature and the status of thecompressors in the circuits.If Pa F22= 1 the outputs of the 2 fans are in parallel and will be controlled as follows:by the greater of the condensation probes in the circuits in cooling modeby the smaller of the condensation probes in the circuits in heating mode
If one of the 2 circuits does not have a condensation probe a configuration alarm will be generated (refer to table ofalarms).
7.3.4 Hydraulic pump controlIf the pump is configured for continuous operation (Pa P01 = 0) it will stay on at all times; if not (Pa P01 = 1) it will beturned on in response to a request from the regulation algorithm.
Interaction between the pump, the compressors and the regulation algorithm status is determined by the followingparameters:
• Pa P02: Delay between pump on and compressors on.• Pa P03: Delay between regulation algorithm off and pump off.
An example is provided in the diagram below:
Errore. Il collegamento non è valido.
During a defrost, when the compressor is off, the pump will stay on.
The pump will go off if:• There is a pump shut-down alarm, such as a flow switch alarm requiring manual reset (refer to table of alarms)
diagram
Reg. algorithm
Compressor
ON
OFF
Pump
ON
OFF
Time
TimeDelay between compressor offand pump offPa P03
Delay between pump onand compressor onPa P02
ON
OFFTime
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 27
• The instrument is on stand-by or off (it goes off after the delay determined by Pa P03)
7.3.5 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater controlEnergy 400 can control 2 anti-freeze electrical heaters;Each electrical heater is controlled with its own set point, which is different for heating and cooling modes, by means ofthe following parameters :• Pa r07 : set point of electrical heater 1 in heating mode• Pa r08 : set point of electrical heater 1 in cooling mode• Pa r13 : set point of electrical heater 2 in heating mode• Pa r14 : set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling mode
The two set points of the anti-freeze electrical heaters fall within a maximum and a minimum value which the user may setin the form of the following parameters:• Pa r09 : maximum set point for anti-freeze electrical heater• Pa r10 : minimum set point for anti-freeze electrical heater
When off or on stand-by. control is based on the cooling set point and the control probe used in heating mode.
Parameter Pa R11 determines hysteresis around the set points for the anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters.
An example of operation is shown in the diagram below
Diagram illustrating anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters control
PARALLEL ELECTRICAL HEATERSParameter r12 enables the parallel electrical heaters function..
This function is useful if the system incorporates 2 hydraulic circuits, each with its own anti-freeze probe, and there is onlyone anti-freeze electrical heater.
The following conditions must apply for the function to be active:
• Pa r12 = 1• Pa r05 other than 0• Pa r06 other than 0.
Control is based on the minimum value detected by the 2 probes, using the set points of electrical heaters 1 (Pa r07 andPa r08)
If Pa r15= 1 the electrical heaters have a dual function, as anti-freeze electrical heaters and supplementary electricalheaters. If Pa r15 = 1 and the system is in heating mode., electrical heater 1 will start up under the command of its owncontrol or if ST1 <(SET HEATING-Pa r14) while heater 2 ) will start up if ST1 <(SET HEATING-Pa r15) . The control hysteresisis Pa C04 (heating control hysteresis).
7.3.6 Reversing valve controlThe reversing valves are turned off if Energy 400 is off or on stand-by;The valves are ON in cooling mode and OFF in heating and defrost modes.
diagram
Parallel electricalheaters
Supplementaryelectrical heaters
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 28
8 FUNCTIONSx
8.1 Recording hours of operation
The devices stores the number of hours of operation of the following in permanent memory:• hydraulic pump• compressors.
It is precise to within one minute.Hours of operation may be displayed by entering the appropriate menu with the label Ohr (refer to menu structure).The whole value is displayed if it is less than 999 hours; if it exceeds this value, the hundreds of hours will be shown andthe decimal point will appear:For example, 1234 hours will be displayed as follows:
To set the number of hours to zero, hold the DOWN key (refer to keys) down for two seconds while displaying the numberof hours of operation.
In the event of a power failure, the latest fraction of an hour recorded is set to 0, so that duration is rounded down:
8.2 Defrost
The defrost function is active in heating mode only.It is used to prevent ice formation on the surface of the external exchanger, which can occur in locations with lowtemperatures and high humidity and will considerably reduce the machine’s thermodynamic performance, creating a riskof damage to the machine.
Defrost start and end depends on the condensation probe values (refer to condensation probes– defrost) and the settingsof the parameters listed below:
8.2.1 Defrost startThe defrost starts as a result of three parameters:• Pa d02 : temperature/pressure at which defrost starts• Pa d03 : defrost interval
When the probe detects temperature/pressure values below the value of parameter Pa d02 it starts the timer, and whenthe number of minutes determined by parameter Pa d03 has expired the defrost will start;
The timer will stop if:• Temperature/pressure rises above the value of parameter Pa d02• The compressor is turned offThe timer will be set to zero if:• a defrost cycle is completed• “Energy 400” is turned off• operating mode is changed (refer to operating modes)• temperature rises above the value of parameter Pa d04 (defrost end temperature/pressure)
During the defrost the compressors are handled as follows:• combined defrost: all compressors are turned on at full power;• separate defrost: all compressors in the circuit being defrosted are turned on at full power;there may be a delay between compressor coming on and Defrost start imposed by parameter Pa d11
Defrost will take place only if the following conditions are met: :• The safety timing of compressors in the circuit must be 0• The delay between circuit defrosts must have expired since the last circuit defrost (Pa d08)
On a dual circuit machine with combined defrost, the following condition must apply:• in the circuit for which defrost start is not requested, compressor safety time = 0 (refer to safety timing) so that the
two circuits may both start a defrost at the same time.
If at the time of defrost start the compressor-4-way valve delay time Pa d06 = 0, the compressor will stay on; if not, theadjustment shown in the diagram below will be carried out.
Stopping timer
Setting timer tozero
Defrost:compressor
management
MEMORY
35.48
MEMORY
35
Power failure
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 29
8.2.2 Control during defrostDuring the defrost cycle loads are controlled as described below:
compressors in the circuit for which defrost is underway will be turned on to full power, if not already on at full power
The reversing valve in the circuit for which defrost is underway will behave the way it does in the summer cycle.When the valve is reversed, a timer begins counting the minimum by-pass time for the circuit involved, equal to “minimumby-pass time during cooling” (Pa A01).
If the condensation pressure detected falls below (Pa F23 — Pa F24), the fan will be OFF; if it exceeds Pa F23, the fan will beON. At the end of the drip stage, if parameter Pa D07 is not 0 the fans will operate at full speed for an amount of timeequal to Pa F25 in order to remove water from the batteries as quickly as possible.If there are no pressure probes on the machine, this will be applied to temperature.
8.2.3 Defrost endDefrost end may be determined by temperature/pressure values read by analogue probes ST3, ST2, ST6 (analogue inputs)or by digital input (digital inputs).
The configuration parameters are:• Pa d09 : Circuit 1 defrost end probe• Pa d10: Circuit 2 defrost end probe
Possible values and meanings of these parameters are shown below:
ValueParameters
Description
0 defrost end in response to digital input1 defrost end in response to ST32 defrost end in response to ST43 defrost end in response to ST6
If Pa d09=0 (defrost end in response to digital input) the digital input configured as “End of defrost circuit 1” (digitalinputs) will be taken into consideration; if Pa d10=0 input “circuit 2 defrost end”(digital inputs) .In this configuration, as soon as the input becomes active the circuit will have a defrost end.
If an analogue input is selected for defrost end, the defrost will end will pressure/temperature rises above the value ofparameter Pa d04 (defrost end temperature/pressure).
If the input is not configured, defrost will end only when pressure/temperature rises above the maximum duration set byparameter Pa d05
Defrost will always end if duration exceeds the maximum duration set by parameter Pa D05.
After defrost end, if drip time Pa d07= 0 the compressors will stay on; if not, the adjustment shown in the figure below willtake place:
diagram
Compressors
Reversing valve
Fans
Parameterconfiguration
Drip time
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 30
diagram
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 31
9 PARAMETERSx
Parameters make the ” Energy 400” a fully configurable device.They may be modified through:• instrument keyboard• Personal computer (with a suitable connection and “Param manager” software)
We will now take a detailed look at all the parameters, divided by category.
9.1 Description of Parameters
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS:Determine the features of the machine.
If one or more of the parameters in this category are modified, the cotnroller must be switched off after the modificationand switched on again to ensure correct operation.
Maximum set point during “heating”Upper limit on set point in “heating” modeMinimum set point during “heating”Lower limit on set point in “heating” modeMaximum set point during “cooling”Upper limit on set point in “cooling” modeMinimum set point during “cooling”Lower limit on set point in “cooling” modeNumber of circuits on machine (∗∗ )Number of cooling circuits0= not permitted1= 1 cooling circuit2= 2 cooling circuitsNumber of compressors per circuit (∗∗ )0= no compressors1= 1 compressor2= 2 compressors3= 3 compressors4= 4 compressorsNumber of capacity steps per compressor (∗∗ )0= no capacity steps1= 1 capacity step per compressor2= 2 capacity steps per compressor3= 3 capacity steps per compressorCompressor on sequence0= depending on hours of operation1= unvaried on sequence Compressor selection algorithm0= circuit saturation1= circuit balancing ST1 configurationUsed to configure analogue input ST10= No probe1= Inflowing air/water analogue input2= Heating request digital input3= Regulation algorithm request digital input4= NTC differential input ST2 configuration0= No probe1= Circuit 1 outflowing water/antifreeze/inlet air analogue input2= Cooling request digital input ST3 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= 4…20 mA condensation input3= 4…20 mA dynamic set point input4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 15= Regulation algorithm input in “heating” mode for water-water machines with manual reversal ST4 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= Multifunctional digital input3= Outdoor temperature analogue input ST5 configuration0= No probe1= Outflowing water/anti-freeze/inlet air analogue input, circuit 2 ST6 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= 4…20 mA condensation input
∗ non sono ammesse configurazioni macchina con numero di gradini superiore a 4
Pa H01
Pa H02
Pa H03
Pa H04
Pa H05
Pa H06
Pa H07
Pa H08
Pa H09
Pa H11
Pa H12
Pa H13
Pa H14
Pa H15
Pa H16
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 32
3= Not permitted4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 2 Bottom of scale pressure valuePressure value corresponding to an analogue input value (ST3 or ST6) on the 20mA input (if configured as a current input).Example if using a pressure transducer with limits of 0-30.0 bar/4-20mA, set PaH17=300 Polarity of digital inputs ID1,ID2,ID3,ID4 Polarity of digital inputs ID5,ID6,ID7,ID8 Polarity of digital inputs ID9,ID10,ID11,ST4 Polarity of digital inputs ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15These parameters may be used to select the polarity which will activate the digital inputs to suit them to various operatingrequirements. Refer to Digital inputs: polarity when setting input polarity. Configuration of digital input ID1 Configuration of digital input ID2 Configuration of digital input ID3 Configuration of digital input ID4 Configuration of digital input ID5 Configuration of digital input ID6 Configuration of digital input ID7 Configuration of digital input ID8 Configuration of digital input ID9 Configuration of digital input ID10 Configuration of digital input ID11 Configuration of digital input ST4 if configured as digital
0 Input disabled 12 Low pressure circuit 11 Flow switch 13 Low pressure circuit 22 Remote OFF 14 High pressure compressor 13 Remote Heat/Cool 15 High pressure compressor 24 Thermal switch compressor 1 16 High pressure compressor 35 Thermal switch compressor 2 17 High pressure compressor 46 Thermal switch compressor 3 18 Defrost end circuit 17 Thermal switch compressor 4 19 Defrost end circuit 28 Thermal switch fan circuit 1 20 Request for power step 29 Thermal switch fan circuit 2 21 Request for power step 310 High pressure circuit 1 22 Request for power step 411 High pressure circuit 2
Configuration of output RL2 Configuration of output RL3 Configuration of output RL4 Configuration of output RL5 Configuration of output RL6 Configuration of output RL7These parameters are used to assign various functions to relays as required by the type of application.0= Not in use1= Reversing valve circuit 12= Reversing valve circuit 23= Condensation fan circuit 14= Condensation fan circuit 25= Electrical heater 16= Electrical heater 27= Hydraulic pump8= Evaporator fan9= Power Step 210= Power Step 311= Power Step 4 Polarity of output RL2 Polarity of output RL3 Polarity of output RL4 Polarity of output RL5 Polarity of output RL8Relay polarity may be set for the corresponding outputs.0=relay on if output active1=relay off if output not active Configuration of analogue output 1 (AN1 or TK1) Configuration of analogue output 2 (AN2 or TK2)Condensation fan control outputs are available with 2 types of signal.0= Suignal for phase cut fan control1= 4-20mA output Not in use Selection of operating mode0= Selection from keyboard1= Selection from digital input Enable dynamic set pointIf enabled, this function permits automatic variation of the working set point depending on outdoor temperature or on a4-20mA analogue input. The parameter has no meaning if PaH13≠3 or PaH14≠3.0= Function disabled1= Function enabled Maximum dynamic set point offset in cooling mode
Pa H17
Pa H18Pa H19Pa H20Pa H21
Pa H23Pa H24Pa H25Pa H26Pa H27Pa H28Pa H29Pa H30Pa H31Pa H32Pa H33Pa H34
Pa H35Pa H36Pa H37Pa H38Pa H39Pa H40
Pa H41Pa H42Pa H43Pa H44Pa H45
Pa H46Pa H47
Pa H48Pa H49
Pa H50
Pa H51
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 33
The maximum value that may be added to the set point in cooling mode (COO) when the DYNAMIC SET POINT function isenabled. Maximum dynamic set point offset in heating modeThe maximum value that may be added to the set point in heating mode (HEA) when the DYNAMIC SET POINT function isenabled. Outdoor temperature set point in cooling modeThe outdoor temperature value on the basis of which …The parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature set point in heating modeThe parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature differential in cooling modeThe parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature differential in heating modeThe parameter is significant only if the set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Offset ST1, Offset ST2, Offset ST3These parameters may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature or pressure reading andthe actual temperature or pressure. Offset ST4 Offset ST5These parameters may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature reading and the actualtemperature. Offset ST6This parameter may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature (or pressure) reading andthe actual temperture or pressure. Mains frequencyMains frequency 50 HzMains frequency 60 Hz Selection °C or °F0= degrees °C1= degrees °F Family serial address, Device serial addressThese parameters may be used to address the device when connected to a personal computer or supervision system.Normally both are 0. User passwordMay be used to enter a password for access to level two parameters, and to copy parameters from the instrument to thecopy card. Copy card write passwordThe password that must be entered to copy parameters to the copy card. Presence of keyboard
ALARM PARAMETERS:
Low pressure pressure switch by-pass time.Determines the delay between starting up the compressor and starting up the low pressure digital alarm diagnostics.Expressed in seconds. Low pressure alarm events per hourUsed to set the number of low pressure digital alarm events per hour beyond which the system will switch from automaticreset to manual reset. Bypass pump activation flow switchDetermines the delay between activation of the hydraulic pump and activation of the flow switch alarm diagnostics.Expressed in seconds. Duration of active flow switch inputMay be used to set the amount of time for which the flow switch digital input must remain active to generate a flowswitch alarm. The timer starts after the flow switch by-pass time. Expressed in seconds. Duration of inactive flow switch inputMay be used to set the time for which the flow switch digital input must remain inactive to be included in thecorresponding alarm. Expressed in seconds. Number of flow switch alarms/hourMay be used to set the number of flow switch digital alarms per hour after which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset . When this occurs, the hydraulic pump is deactivated. By-pass compressor thermal switch following compressor onDetermines the delay between compressor activation and activation of the compressor thermal switch digital diagnosticsalarm. Expressed in seconds.Compressor thermal switch alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of compressor thermal switch alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm is switchedfrom automatic to manual reset.Number of fan thermal switch events per hourMay be used to set a number of fan thermal events per hour beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset .Anti-freeze alarm by-passDetermines the delay between turning on the machine (selection of an operating mode or switch from OFF->ON) andactivation of the compressor thermal switch digital alarm diagnostics. Expressed in seconds.Anti-freeze alarm set point
Pa H52
Pa H53
Pa H54
Pa H55
Pa H56
Pa H57Pa H58Pa H59
Pa H60Pa H61
Pa H62
Pa H63
Pa H64
Pa H65Pa H66
Pa H67
Pa H68
Pa H68
Pa A01
Pa A02
Pa A03
Pa A04
Pa A05
Pa A06
Pa A07
Pa A08
Pa A09
Pa A10
Pa A11
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 34
May be used to set the temperature below which the anti-freeze alarm is triggered.Anti-freeze alarm hysteresisMay be used to set the differential value of the anti-freeze alarm.Anti-freeze alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of anti-freeze alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset .Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation set pointMay be used to set a condensation pressure/temperature value beyond which the high pressure alarm will be triggered.Analogue input high pressure/temperature hysteresisMay be used to set the differential for the analogue high pressure alarm.Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation bypassDetermines the delay after turning on of the first compressor in the cooling circuit and activation of the correspondinganalogue input low pressure/temperature analogue alarm diagnostics.Analogue input low pressure/temperature activation set pointMay be used to set a temperature/pressure value below which the low pressure alarm will be triggered.Analogue input low pressure/temperature hysteresisMay be used to set the differential for the analogue low pressure/temperature alarm.Number of analogue input low pressure alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of low pressure analogue alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm will be switchedfrom automatic to manual reset.Machine out of coolant differentialIf the difference between the absolute value of the set point and of the control probe exceeds this parameter, the machineout of coolant timer will start.Bypass machine out of coolantDetermines the delay between the turning on of the first compressor in the corresponding cooling circuit and activation ofthe machine out of coolant alarm diagnostics. Expressed in minutes.Duration of machine out of coolantDetermines the duration of the condition described under parameter A20 beyond which the machine out of coolant alarmwill be triggered.Machine out of coolant alarm triggeredEnables machine out of coolant alarm diagnostics0= diagnostics disabled1= diagnostics enabled Enable low pressure alarm during defrostingEnables the minimum alarm during defrosting.0= Low pressure alarm diagnostics disabled during defrosting1= Low pressure alarm diagnostics enabled during defrosting Input over-temperature set pointTemperature value ST1 above which the high temperature alarm E46 is triggered. Input over-temperature durationDetermines the duration of the condition described for parameter A25 beyond which the input over-temperature alarm istriggered.
COMPRESSOR PARAMETERS
OFF-ON safety timeThe minimum amount of time that must pass between turning off the compressor and turning it on again. Expressed intens of seconds.ON-ON safety timeThe minimum amount of time that must pass between turning the compressor on and turning it on again. Expressed intens of seconds.Hysteresis regulation algorithm during coolingMay be used to select intervention differential in cooling mode.Hysteresis regulation algorithm during heatingMay be used to select intervention differential in heating mode. Regulation algorithm step intervention differentialMay be used to set a temperature differential in relation to the set point beyond which the second step is activated. Compressor on intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning on of two compressors. Compressor off intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning off of two compressors. Capacity step on intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning on of compressor and of capacity steps.
FAN CONTROL PARAMETERS:
Fan output configuration0 = proportional fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on parameters)1 = fan output “on-off”; in this mode the regulation algorithm performs the same calculation as in proportional fanoutput, but if the result is greater than 0, regulation algorithmoutput will be 100.2 = on-off operation in response to request from compressor. In this mode output is 0 if no compressor in the circuit ison, or 100% if at least one compressor in the circuit is on.Fan pick-up timeTime for which fan runs at maximum speed after starting up. Expressed in seconds/10.Fan phase shiftThis parameter may be used to calibrate fan control output in proportion to the type of fan in use, adjusting it to suit thefan’s typical current/voltage phase shift.Impulse duration of triac onMay be used to vary the length of the impulse from the triac command.Functioning in resposne to compressor request
Pa A12
Pa A13
Pa A14
Pa A15
Pa A16
Pa A17
Pa A18
Pa A19
Pa A20
Pa A21
Pa A22
Pa A23
Pa A24
Pa A25
Pa A26
Pa C01
Pa C02
Pa C03
Pa C04
Pa C05
Pa C06
Pa C07
Pa C08
Pa F01
Pa F02
Pa F03
Pa F04
Pa F05
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 35
0= if compressor is off, fan is off1= condensation control independent of compressorMinimum speed during coolingMinimum value of proportional fan control during cooling. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Maximum silent speed during coolingMaximum value of proportional fan control during cooling. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during coolingCondensation pressure/temperature value below which the fan runs at minimum cooling speed.Proportional band during coolingTemperature/pressure differential corresponding to change from minimum to silent maximum fan speed during cooling(F07).Fan cut-off differentialCondensation temperature/pressure differential in relation to temperature/pressure set point (F08 or F14) beyond whichfan is cut off.Cut-off hysteresis.Condensation temperature/pressure differential for cut-off.Cut-off bypass timeDetermines the amount of time after fan start-up during which fan cut-off is excluded. Expressed in seconds.Maximum speed during coolingMay be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value in cooling mode.Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure during coolingCondensation pressure/temperature value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F13.Minimum speed during heatingMinimum proportional fan control value in heating mode. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Maximum silent speed during heatingMaximum value of proportional fan control during heating. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during heatingCondensation temperature/pressure value above which the fan operates at minimum heating speed.Proportional band during heatingTemperature/pressure differential corresponding to a change from minimum to maximum silent fan speed during heating(F16).Maximum speed during heatingMay be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value during heating.Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during heatingCondensation temperature/pressure value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F19.Preventilation in cooling modeMay be used to set a preventilation time in cooling mode before compressor combines on in order to prevent.…Combined or separate fan controlParameter F22 may be used to configure dual circuit machines with a single condenser.Parameter F22 condensation type0= separate condensers1= combined condenser.If Pa F22 = 0 the fans are independent and depend on condensation pressure/temperature and the status of thecompressors in the circuits. If Pa F22= 1 the outputs of the 2 fans are parallel and they are controlled:on the basis of the greater of the two circuit condensation probes in cooling modeon the basis of the smaller of the two circuit condensation probes in heating modeIf there is no condensation probe in one of the 2 circuits, a configuration alarm will be generated. Fan activation temperature/pressure set point during defrostingDuring defrosting, if temperature/pressure exceeds the “fan activation during defrosting” threshold (Pa F23) the fans willcome on at full power.Fan activation hysteresis during defrostingCondensation temperature/pressure differential for fan control during defrosting.
PUMP PARAMETERS
Pump operating modeMay be used to determine pump operating mode:0=continuous operation1=operation in response to a request from the regulation algorithmDelay between pump ON and compressor ONMay be used to set a delay between starting a pump and starting a compressor, expressed in seconds.Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFFMay be used to set a delay between turning off a compressor and turning off a pump, expressed in seconds.
ANTI-FREEZE/BOILER PARAMETERS
Configuration of electrical heaters in defrost modeDetermines electrical heater operation during defrosting0=come on only in response to a request from the regulation algorithm1=always on during defrostingConfiguration of electrical heaters on in cooling modeDetermines electrical heater operation in cooling mode0=off during cooling1=on during cooling (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)Configuration of electrical heaters on in heating modeDetermines electrical heater operation in heating mode
Pa F06
Pa F07
Pa F08
Pa F09
Pa F10
Pa F11
Pa F12
Pa F13
Pa F14
Pa F15
Pa F16
Pa F17
Pa F18
Pa F19
Pa F20
Pa F21
Pa F22
Pa F23
Pa F24
Pa P01
Pa P02
Pa P03
Pa r01
Pa r02
Pa r03
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 36
0=off during heating1= on during cooling (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probeConfiguration of electrical heater 2 control probeDetermines the control probes belonging to electrical heaters in heating mode0= Not present1=Control probe ST12=Control probe ST23= Control probe ST5Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on stand-byDetermines the status of electrical heaters when the instrument is OFF or on stand-by0=Always off when OFF or on stand-by1=On when OFF or on stand-by (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm)Set point of anti-freeze electrial heater 1 in heating modeTemperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in heating mode.Set point of anti-freeze electrical heater 1 in cooling modeTemperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in cooling mode.Maximum set point of anti-freeze electrical heatersDetermines the maximum setting of the anti-freeze electrical heater set points.Minimum set point of anti-freeze electrical heatersDetermines the minimumsetting of the anti-freeze electrcial heater set points.Anti-freeze heater hysteresisAnti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm hysteresis.Set point of external anti-freeze electrical heatersTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters in the secondary circuit come on.Set point of electrical heater 2 in heating modeTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in heating mode.Set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling modeTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in cooling mode.Enable supplementary electrical heaters
DEFROST PARAMETERS::
Defrost enabled0= defrost function enabled1= defrost function disabledDefrost start temperature / pressureTemperature/pressure below which the defrost cycle is started.Defrost interval (response time)Duration for which probe remains below defrost start temperature/pressure, expressed in minutes.Defrost end temperature/pressureTemperature/pressure above which defrost ends.Maximum defrost time (time-out)Maximum duration of defrost in minutes.Compressor-reversing valve wait time (anti-bleeding)Wait time between compressor going off and reversal of the 4-way valve at the beginning of the defrost cycle.Drip timeWait time at the end of the defrost cycle between the compressor going off and the reversal of the 4-way valve. Temperature at which defrost starts if Pa H49= 1Temperature below which the defrost cycle is started. Temperature at which defrost ends if Pa H49=1Temperature above which the defrost cycle is ended.
9.2 Parameters table
All ”Energy 400” parameters are listed in the table below.
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS *Par. Description Value Limits Unit of meas.
Pa H01 Maximum set point during heating H02 ÷ 90.0 °CPa H02 Minimum set point during heating -40.0 ÷ H01 °CPa H03 Maximum set point during cooling H04 ÷ 90.0 °CPa H04 Minimum set point during cooling -40.0 ÷ H03 °CPa H05 Number of circuits on machine 0 ÷ 2 NumPa H06 Number of compressors per circuit 0 ÷ 4 NumPa H07 Number of capacity steps per compressor 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H08 Compressors on sequence 0÷1 FlagPa H09 Circuit balancing 0÷1 FlagPa H10 Presence of heat pump 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H11 Configuration ST1 0 ÷ 4 NumPa H12 Configuration ST2 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H13 Configuration ST3 0 ÷ 5 NumPa H14 Configuration ST4 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H15 Configuration ST5 0 ÷ 5 NumPa H16 Configuration ST6 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H17 Bottom of scale pressure value 0-350 KPa*10Pa H18 Polarity ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H19 Polarity ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8 0 ÷ 1 Flag
Pa r04Pa r05
Pa r06
Pa r07
Pa r08
Pa r09
Pa r10
Pa r11
Pa r12
Pa r13
Pa r14
Pa r15
Pa d01
Pa d02
Pa d03
Pa d04
Pa d05
Pa d06
Pa d07
Pa d08
Pa d09
Configurationparameters
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 37
Pa H20 Polarity ID9 ID10 ID11 ST4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H21 Polarity ST1 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H22 Polarity ST2 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H23 Configuration ID1 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H24 Configuration ID2 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H25 Configuration ID3 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H26 Configuration ID4 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H27 Configuration ID5 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H28 Configuration ID6 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H29 Configuration ID7 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H30 Configuration ID8 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H31 Configuration ID9 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H32 Configuration ID10 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H33 Configuration ID11 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H34 Configuration ST4 if digital input 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H35 Configuration relay 2 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H36 Configuration relay 3 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H37 Configuration relay 4 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H38 Configuration relay 5 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H39 Configuration relay 6 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H40 Configuration relay 7 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H41 Polarity RL2 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H42 Polarity RL3 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H43 Polarity RL4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H44 Polarity RL5 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H45 Alarm relay polarity 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H46 Configuration fan 1 output 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H47 Configuration fan 2 output 0 ÷ 2 NumPa H48 Free 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H49 Selection of operating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H50 Enable dynamic set point 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H51 Offset of dynamic set point during cooling -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H52 Offset of dynamic set point during heating -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H53 Dynamic outdoor temp. set point during cooling 0 ÷ 255 °CPa H54 Dynamic outdoor temp. set point during heating 0 ÷ 255 °CPa H55 Delta dynamic outdoor temp. set point during cooling -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H56 Delta dynamic outdoor temp. set point during heating -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H57 Offset ST1 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H58 Offset ST2 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H59 Offset ST3 -127 ÷ 127 °C/10-Kpa*10Pa H60 Offset ST4 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H61 Offset ST5 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H62 Offset ST6 -127 ÷ 127 °C/10-Kpa*10Pa H63 0=50 Hz 1=60 Hz 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H64 0= °C 1=°F FlagPa H65 Family serial address 0 ÷ 14 Num.Pa H66 Device serial address 0 ÷ 14 Num.Pa H67 User password 0 ÷ 255 Num.Pa H68 Copy card password 0 ÷ 255 Num.
* If parameters in this category are modified, the controller must be turned off and on again to ensure correctfunctioning.
ALARM PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa A01 Low pressure switch bypass time after compressor on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A02 Low pressure alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A03 Flow switch bypass time after pump on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A04 Duration of active flow switch input 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A05 Duration of inactive flow switch input 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A06 Number of flow switch alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A07 Bypass compressor thermal switch from compressor on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A08 Number of compressors 1 + 2 thermal switch alarms/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A09 Number of fan thermal switch alarm events/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A10 Anti-freeze alarm bypass after ON-OFF 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A11 Anti-freeze alarm activation set point -127 ÷ 127 °CPa A12 Hysteresis of anti-freeze alarm 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa A13 Anti-freeze alarm events/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A14 Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation set
point0 ÷ 900 °C/10 – Kpa*10
Pa A15 Analogue input high pressure hysteresis 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A16 Analogue input low pressure activation bypass 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A17 Analogue input low pressure activation set point -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A18 Analogue input low pressure hysteresis 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A19 Analogue input low pressure alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 Num
Alarm parameters
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 38
Pa A20 Machine out of coolant differential 0 ÷ 255 °CPa A21 Machine out of coolant bypass 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A22 Machine out of coolant duration 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A23 Machine out of coolant alarm triggered 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa A24 Enable low pressure alarm during defrost 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa A25 Input over-temperature set point 0 ÷ 255 °CPa A26 Input over-temperature duration 0 ÷ 255 S*10
COMPRESSOR PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa C01 ON-OFF safety time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa C02 ON-ON safety time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa C03 Hysteresis regulation algorithm during cooling 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa C04 Hysteresis regulation algorithm during heating 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa C05 Regulation algorithm step intervention deltaPa C06 Compressor – compressor on interval 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa C07 Compressor – compressor off interval 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa C08 Capacity step on interval 0 ÷ 255 Seconds
FAN CONTROL PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa F01 Fan output mode 0 ÷ 2 Num.Pa F02 Fan pick-up time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds/10Pa F03 Fan phase shift 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F04 Impulse duration of triak on 0 ÷ 255 uS*100Pa F05 Functioning in response to compressor request 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa F06 Minimum speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F07 Maximum silent speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F08 Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during
cooling-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10
Pa F09 Prop. band during cooling 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F10 Delta cut-off 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F11 Cut-off hysteresis. 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F12 Bypass time cut-off 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa F13 Max speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F14 Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during
cooling-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10
Pa F15 Minimum speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F16 Maximum silent speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F17 Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during
heating-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10
Pa F18 Prop. band during heating 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F19 Maximum fan speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F20 Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during
heating-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10
Pa F21 Preventilation in cooling mode 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa F22 Combined or separate fan control 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa F23 Fan activation temperature/pressure set point during
defrosting-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10
Pa F24 Fan activation hysteresis during defrosting 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F25 Preventilation after defrosting 0 ÷ 255 Seconds
PUMP PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa P01 Pump operating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa P02 Delay between pump ON and compressor ON 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa P03 Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFF 0 ÷ 255 Seconds
ELECTRICAL HEATER PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa r01 Configuration of electrical heaters in defrost mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa R02 Configuration of electrical heaters on in cooling mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r03 Configuration of electrical heaters on in heating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r04 Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probe 0 ÷ 6 NumPa r05 Configuration of electrical heater 2 control probe 0 ÷ 6 NumPa r06 Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on STAND-BY 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r07 Set point of electrical heater 1 in heating mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r08 Set point of electrical heater 1 in cooling mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r09 Max. set point electrical heaters P r10 ÷ 127 °CPa r10 Min. set point electrical heaters -127 ÷ P r09 °CPa r11 hysteresis of anti-freeze heaters 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa R12 Set point of external anti-freeze electrical heaters Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r13 Set point of electrical heater 2 in heating mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r14 Set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °C
Compressorparameters
Fan controlparameters
Pump parameters
Electrical heaterparameters
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 39
Pa r15 Enable supplementary electrical heaters 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r16 Delta of activation of supplementary heater 1 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa r17 Delta of activation of supplementary heater 2 0 ÷ 25.5 °C
DEFROST PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa d01 Defrost enabled 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa d02 Defrost start temperature/pressure -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa d03 Defrost interval 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa d04 Defrost end temperature/pressure -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa d05 Maximum defrost time 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa d06 Compressor-reversing valve wait time 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa d07 Drip time 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa d08 Delay between defrosting of circuits 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa d09 Output probe defrost circuit 1 0 ÷ 8 NumPa d10 Output probe defrost circuit 2 0 ÷ 8 NumPa d11 Delay in compressors on in defrost mode 0 ÷ 255 Seconds
EXTENSION PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa N01 Polarity of ID12 ID13 ID14 ID15 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa N02 Configuration ID12 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N03 Configuration ID13 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N04 Configuration ID14 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N05 Configuration ID15 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N06 Configuration relay 9 0 ÷ 11 NumPa N07 Configuration relay 10 0 ÷ 11 Num
Defrostparameters
Extensionparameters
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 40
10 DIAGNOSTICSx
“Energy 400” can perform full systems diagnostics and signal a series of alarms.Alarm trigger and reset modes are set using parameters Pa A01 – Pa A26.For some alarms the signal will not be given for a certain amount of time, determined by a parameter.For some alarms the number of alarm events is counted; if the number of alarm events in the past hour exceeds a certainthreshold set by a parameter, the alarm will switch from automatic to manual reset.Alarms are sampled every 113 seconds;Example: if the number of events/hour is set to 3, the duration of an alarm must fall between 2*113 seconds and 3*113seconds for the alarm to be switched from automatic to manual reset.
If an alarm is triggered more than once within one sampling period (113 seconds), only one alarm will be counted.
Alarms with manual reset are reset by pressing the ON-OFF button and releasing
Manual reset shuts down corresponding loads and requires an operator to intervene (reset the alarm using the ON-OFFcontrol).Manual reset alarms are used mainly to identify problems which could result in damage to the system
10.1 List of alarms
When an alarm is triggered, two things occur:• The corresponding loads are shut down• The alarm appears on the keyboard display
The alarm message consists of a code with the format “Enn” (where nn is a 2-digit number identifying the type of alarm,such as: E00, E25, E39….).All possible alarms are listed in the table below, along with their codes and the corresponding loads that will be shutdown:
Alarms
Alarm events perhour
Time225 s 225 s 225 s 225 s
1 2 3Counter
Alarm
Automatic reset Manual reset
Alarm sampling
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 41
LOADS SHUT DOWNCODE MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONCOMP.1 COMP.2 COMP.3 COMP.4 FAN1 FAN2 PUMP RES.1 RES.2
E00 Remote off • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Remote OFF”
(refer to digital inputs)
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E01 High pressure circuit 1 • Compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
circuit 1” (refer to digital inputs)
YES YES1 YES1 YES1
E02 Low pressure circuit 1 • Compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down; also condenserfans if condensation is separate for the 2 circuits (refer tocombined or separate condensation);
• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressurecircuit 1” (refer to digital inputs);
• Automatically reset unless alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A02, after which manually reset;
• Inactive during timer Pa A01 after compressor on or reversalof 4-way valve (reversing valve) in circuit 1
YES YES1 YES1 YES1 YES YES2
E03 Thermal switchprotection compressor 1
• Compressor 1 will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch
compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the
value of parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.
YES
E04 Thermal switchprotection condenserfan circuit 1
• Fans and compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down; if the 2circuits are set up for combined condensation, (refer tocombined or separate condensation) compressors in circuit 2will also be shut down;
• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switchfan circuit 1” (refer to digital inputs);
• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A09, after which manually reset;
YES YES1 YES1 —
YES2YES1 —
YES2YES YES2
E05 Anti-freeze circuit 1 • Fans and compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST2 (refer to analogue inputs) is
configured as anti-freeze probe (Pa H12 = 1);• Triggered when probe ST2 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Turned off if probe ST2 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +
Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the
value of parameter Pa A13,after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on
with the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or from the digitalinput ON-OFF (refer to digital inputs) or when heating modeis started.
YES YES1 YES1 YES1 YES YES2
E06 Probe ST2 fault • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered if probe ST2, configured as an analogue input,
shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E07 Probe ST3 fault • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered if probe ST3, configured as an analogue input,
shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
Tabella Allarmi
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 42
E08 External circuit 1 anti-freeze
• Fans and compressors will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST3 (refer to analogue inputs) is
configured as an external anti-freeze probe (Pa H13 = 4);• Active when probe ST3 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Goes off if probe ST3 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +
Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value
of parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on
using the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or ON-OFF digitalinput (refer to digital inputs) or heating mode is switched on.
YES YES YES YES YES YES
E09 High pressurecompressor 1
Compressor 1 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset
YES
E13 Thermal switchprotection compressor 2
Compressor 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch
compressor 2” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value of
parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor is turned on.
YES
E19 High pressurecompressor 2
Compressor 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset
YES
E21 High pressure circuit 2 Compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
circuit 2” (refer to digital inputs)
YES YES
E22 Low pressure circuit 2 Compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down, as well as condenserfans if the 2 circuits have separate condensation (refer tocombined or separate condensation);
Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressurecircuit 2” (refer to digital inputs);
Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A02, after which manually reset;
Inactive during timer Pa A01 after compressor on or reversal of4-way valve (reversing valve) of circuit 1
YES YES YES YES2
E23 Thermal switchprotection compressor 3
Compressor 3 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch
compressor 3” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach value of
parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.
YES
E24 Thermal switchprotection condenserfan circuit 2
Fans and compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down; if the 2 circuitshave combined condensation (refer to combined or separatecondensation) the compressors in circuit 1 will also be shutdown;
Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch circuit2 fan” (refer to digital inputs);
Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches value ofparameter Pa A09, after which manually reset;
YES2 YES2 YES YES YES2 YES
Anti-freeze circuit 2 Fans and compressors will be shut down; YES YES YES2 YES
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 43
Active if analogue probe ST5 (refer to analogue inputs) isconfigured as anti-freeze probe (Pa H15 = 1);
Triggered when probe ST5 detects a value below Pa A11;Turns off when probe ST5 detects a value above Pa A11 + Pa
A12;Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches value of
parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A10 after turning on Energy 400 using
On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or digital input ON-OFF(refer to digital inputs) or start of heating mode.
E26 Probe ST5 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST5, configured as an analogue input, shorts
or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E27 Probe ST6 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST6, configured as an analogue input, shorts
or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E08 External circuit 2 anti-freeze
• Fans and compressors will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST6 (refer to analogue inputs) is
configured as an external anti-freeze probe (Pa H13 = 4);• Active when probe ST6 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Goes off if probe ST6 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +
Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value
of parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on
using the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or ON-OFF digitalinput (refer to digital inputs) or heating mode is switched on.
YES YES YES YES YES YES
E29 High pressurecompressor 3
Compressor 3 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
compressor 3” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset
YES
E33 Thermal switchprotection compressor 4
Compressor 4 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch
compressor 4” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the value of
parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.
YES
E39 High pressurecompressor 4
Compressor 4 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
compressor 4” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset
YES
E40 Probe ST1 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST1, configured as an analogue input, shorts
or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E41 Flow switch All compressors, fans and pump will be cut off if manuallyreset;
Triggered if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (referto digital inputs) remains active for an amount of timeequal to Pa A04;
Goes off if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (referto digital inputs) remains inactive for an amount of timeequal to Pa A05;
YES YES YES YES YES YES SI3
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 44
Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A06 , after which manually reset;
Inactive during timer Pa A03 following pump on.E42 Probe ST4 fault All loads will be shut down;
Triggered if probe ST4, configured as an analogue input,shorts, is cut off, or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E45 Configuration error All loads will be shut down;Triggered if at least one of the following conditions apply:H11= 2 (ST1 configured as request for heating), H12= 2 (ST2
configured as request for cooling) and both inputs areactive.
Sum of compressors and capacity steps on machine exceeds 4The keyboard is declared present (Pa H69=1) and there is no
communication between the keyboard and the basic unit.
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E46 All loads will be shut down except the pump;Triggered if probe ST1 (refer to analogue inputs) has a value
exceeding Pa A25 for an amount of time exceeding Pa 26in cooling mode;
Goes off if probe ST1 (refer to analogue inputs) has a valuelower than Pa A25 – Pa A12;
Automatically reset.
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
1 If it belongs to circuit 12 If combined condensation system3 Only if manual reset e
outputs defined as capacity steps will go off if there is an alarm for the compressor to which they belong
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 45
The tables below list alarms by type (digital or analogue).
TABLE OF DIGITAL ALARMS:
Alarm name Bypass trigger event Bypass time Triggerduration
Deactivationduration
N. alarmevents/hour
Compressor 1,2,3,4 highpressure alarm
None absent absent absent Manual reset
High pressure circuitalarm
None absent absent absent Manual reset
Low pressure alarm A compressor comingon in the circuit orreversal of 4-wayvalve
Pa A01 absent absent Pa A02
Flow switch alarm Pump coming on Pa A03 Pa A04 Pa A05 Pa A06Compressor 1,2,3,4thermal switch alarm
Compressor comingon
Pa A07 absent absent Pa A08
Fan 1,2 thermal switchalarm
None absent absent absent Pa A09
TABLE OF ANALOGUE ALARMS:
Alarm name Event Bypasstime
Triggerset point
Hysteresis N. alarmevents/hour
Regulation probe
Anti-freezealarm circuit1
On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off
Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive
Pa A13 ST2 if configuration parameter PaH12 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive
Anti-freezealarm circuit2
On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off
Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive
Pa A13 ST5 if configuration parameter PaH15 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive
Externalanti-freezealarmcircuit 1
On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off
Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive
Pa A13 ST3 if configuration parameter PaH13 = 4, otherwise alarm isinactive
Externalanti-freezealarm circuit2
On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off
Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive
Pa A13 ST6 if configuration parameter PaH16 = 4, otherwise alarm isinactive
Low pressure/lowtemperaturecondensationalarm circuit1
Compressorturned on orreversal of 4-way valve
Par A16 Pa A17 Pa A18positive
Pa A19 ST3 se Pa H13=1 or 2 or else ST4if Pa H14 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive
Low pressure/lowtemperaturecondensationalarm circuit2
Compressorturned on orreversal of 4-3way valve
Par A16 Pa A17 Pa A18positive
Pa A19 ST6 if Pa H16=1, otherwise alarmis inactive
Highpressure/hightemperaturecondensationalarm circuit1
None absent Pa A14 Pa A15negative
Manual reset ST3 if Pa H13=1 or 2, or ST4 if PaH14 = 1; otherwise alarm isinactive
Highpressure/hightemperaturecondensationalarm circuit2
None absent Pa A14 Pa A15negative
Manual reset ST6 if Pa H16=1 or 2, otherwisealarm is inactive
Hightemperatureregulationalgorithmalarm*
None absent Pa A25 Pa A12negative
Automaticreset
ST1
Digital alarms
Analogue alarms
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 46
11 TECHNICAL FEATURESx
11.1 Technical data
Typical Min. Max.Power supply voltage 12V~ 10V~ 14V~Power supply frequency 50Hz/60Hz — —Power 5VA — —Insulation class 1 — —Protection grade Front panel
IP0— —
Operating temperature 25°C 0°C 60°COperating humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%
Storage temperature 25°C -20°C 85°CStorage humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%
11.2 Electromechanical features
110/230 V digital outputs n° 8 5 A resistive relays; ¼ hp 230VAC; 1/8 hp 125VACAnalogue outputs n° 2 triac piloting outputs or configurable 4-20 mA outputs
n° 1 4-20 mA outputAnalogue inputs n° 4 NTC R25 10KΩ
N° 2 configurable input or 4-20mA o r NTC R25 10KΩDigital inputs n° 11 voltage-free digital inputs 10m ATerminals and connectors n° 1 10-way high voltage connectors, step 7.5
n° 2 16-way rapid clamp connectors for low voltage, step 4.2, AWG 16-28n° 1 p2.5 5–way connector for remote control and programming withexternal copy card, AWG 24-30n° 1 20-way connector for connection of extensionn° 1 3-way screw terminal for remote keyboard
Serial ports n° 1 9600 serial portn° 1 2400 serial port
The instrument must be powered with a suitable current transformer with the following features:
• Primary voltage: 230V~-15%÷+6%; 110V~±10%• Secondary voltage: 12V~• Power supply frequency: 50Hz; 60Hz• Power: 5VA;
11.3 Regulations
The product complies with the following European Community Directives:• Council Directive 73/23/CEE and subsequent modifications• Council directive 89/336/CEE and subsequent modifications
and complies with the following harmonised regulations:• LOW VOLTAGE: EN60730• EMISSION: EN50081-1 (EN55022)• IMMUNITY: EN50082-1 (IEC 801-2,3,4)
currenttransformer
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 47
12 USE OF THE DEVICEx
12.1 Permitted use
This product is used to control single and dual circuit chillers and heat pumps.
To ensure safety, the controller must be installed and operated in accordance with the instructions supplied, and access tohigh voltage components must be prevented under regular operating conditions. The device shall be properly protectedagainst water and dust and shall be accessible by using a tool only. The device is suitable for incorporation in a householdappliance and/or similar air conditioning device.According to the reference regulations, it is classified:• In terms of construction, as an automatic electronic control device to be incorporated with independent assembly or
integrated;• In terms of automatic operating features, as a type 1 action control device, with reference to manufacturing
tolerances and drifts;• As a class 2 device in relation to protection against electrical shock;• As a class A device in relation to software structure and class.
12.2 Forbidden use
Any use other than the permitted use is forbidden.Please note that relay contacts supplied are functional and are subject to fault (in that they are controlled by an electroniccomponent and be shorted or remain open); protection devices recommended by product standards or suggested bycommon sense in response to evident safety requirements shall be implemented outside of the instrument.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 48
13 RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKSx
Microtech shall not be held liable for any damage incurred as a result of:• installation/use other than those intended, and, in particular, failure to comply with the safety instructions specified
by applicable regulations and/or provided in this document;• use with equipment which does not provide adequate protection against electric shocks, water and dust under the
effective conditions of installation;• use with equipment which permits access to hazardous parts without the use of tools;• installation/use with equipment which does not comply with current regulations and legislation.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 49
14 GLOSSARYx
Multiple inputs with an OR relationship to one another are equivalent to a single input with the following status:• Active if at least one input is active• Inactive if no input is active
To “Scroll up” a menu means listing the various parameters from the bottom up (Pa10 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 08 ….)
Indicates that the instrument is waiting, in stand-by mode; all functions are suspended.
Set to zero.
Resetting an alarm means reactivating it ready for a new signal.
A manual reset alarm must be reset using the keyboard.
To “Scroll down” in a menu is to list parameters from the top down (Pa08 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 10 ….)
Means flashing; normally refers to leds
Average number of hours is the ratio between the total number of hours for which the compressors are available and thenumber of compressors in the circuit
Devices in the system, including compressors, fans, hydraulic pump, electrical anti-freeze heaters…
A reference value (set by the user) defining the system’s operating status, such as the thermostat that controlstemperature in the home: if we want to maintain a temperature of 20 °C we set the set point to 20°C (the heating systemwill come on if the temperature in the house falls below 20°C, and go off if it exceeds this value).
Values falling within a given interval; Range 1…100 indicates all values between 1 and 100
A hysteresis is normally defined around a set point to prevent frequent oscillation of the change of status of the load beingcontrolled;Example: suppose we have a set point of 20 °C on a probe for measurement of room temperature, above which acompressor will be started up;When room temperature nears the set point (20 °C) there will be an unstable phase during which the relay which starts upthe compressor will frequently switch from ON to OFF and vice versa, which could result in serious damage to the system.To prevent this problem a hysteresis is defined: an interval of tolerance within which there will be no change in status; inour example, we could set a hysteresis of 1 °C, in which case the compressor would be started up at 21 °C (set point +hysteresis) and turned off at 19 °C (set point – hysteresis)
Memory in which data is maintained even when the device is turned off (as distinct from temporary memory, the data inwhich is lost when the device is turned off.)
Temperature/pressure below or above which proportional output is cut off.
OR logico
Scroll up
Stand-by
Reset
Reset alarm
Manual reset
Scroll down
BLINK
Average numberof hours
Loads
Set Point
Range
Hysteresis
Permanentmemory
Cut-off
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 50
15 ANALITIC INDEX
AAlarm events per hour ………………………………….40Alarm parameters ………………………………………..37Alarms …………………………………………………………..40Analogue alarms ………………………………………….45Analogue inputs …………………………………………….6
configuration table …………………………………7resolution and precision……………………………7
Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heatercontrol……………………………………………………….27diagram……………………………………………………..27
Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters…………………………………………………………………..19configuration ………………………………………….19probe configuration…………………………………19
Average number of hours…………………………….49BBLINK …………………………………………………………….49CCF (Control Fan) Modules ……………………………..5Combined or Separate Condensation…………26Components……………………………………………………5Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences
…………………………………………………………………..16Compressor configuration……………………………15
Simple compressors…………………………………15with 1 capacity step…………………………………15with 2 or 3 capacity steps………………………..15
Compressor control – regulation algorithm.23Cooling diagram ……………………………………..23Heating diagram……………………………………….24
Compressor parameters……………………………….38Compressor timing ……………………………………….17
Off-on and on-on diagram for 1compressor …………………………………………..17
Off-on timing ……………………………………………17on-on and off-off diagram 2 comp………..18On-on off-off times for 2 comp……………..17On-on timing…………………………………………….17
Compressor timing: ………………………………………18Compressors………………………………………………….15
coming on on the basis of hours ofoperation and circuit balancing …….16
coming on on the basis of hours ofoperation and circuit saturation ……16
unvaried on sequence with circuitbalancing …………………………………………….17
unvaried on sequence with circuitsaturation ……………………………………………17
Condensation fan …………………………………………18Condensation fan control…………………………….24
Cool mode ………………………………………………..24
Heat mode ………………………………………………. 25Condensation-Defrost probes …………………….. 19
probe configuration …………………………….. 20separate or combined condensation .. 20
Configuration of analogue inputs …………………6Configuration of digital inputs………………………8Configuration of fan outputs…………………………9Configuration of outputs ……………………………….9Configuration parameters ………………………….. 36Connection diagrams……………………………………..6Control during defrost ………………………………… 29
Compressors…………………………………………….. 29Fans ………………………………………………………….. 29Reversing valve ………………………………………… 29
Cooling ………………………………………………………… 21Copy Card …………………………………………………5; 14Cross references ………………………………………………4current transformer …………………………………….. 46Cut-off …………………………………………………………. 49DDefrost …………………………………………………………. 28
compressor management ………………………. 28Defrost end ………………………………………………….. 29
diagram ……………………………………………………. 30Parameter configuration………………………… 29
Defrost parameters……………………………………… 39Defrost start ………………………………………………… 28
diagram ……………………………………………………. 29Setting timer to zero………………………………. 28Stopping timer………………………………………… 28
Description of Parameters ………………………….. 31Device off……………………………………………………… 21DIAGNOSTICS ……………………………………………… 40Differential temperature control………………… 24Digital alarms ……………………………………………… 45Digital inputs ………………………………………………….8
Configuration Table…………………………………8polarity………………………………………………………..8Polarity table ………………………………………………8
Display …………………………………………………………. 10Drip time ……………………………………………………… 29Dynamic Set point ………………………………………. 21
Control parameters ………………………………… 22Modification depending on current input
with negative offset……………………………. 22Modification depending on current input
with positive offset……………………………… 22Modification depending on outdoor
temperature with negative offset……… 23Modification depending on outdoor
temperature with positive offset………. 22
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 51
EElectrical heater parameters ……………………….38Electromechanical features………………………….46Energy 400 ………………………………………………………5Extension…………………………………………………………5Extension parameters …………………………………..39FFan configuration …………………………………………18
selection of output type…………………………..18Fan control configuration……………………………18Fan control in cool mode
diagram……………………………………………………..25Fan control in heat mode
diagram……………………………………………………..25Fan control parameters ……………………………….38Forbidden use ……………………………………………….47FUNCTIONS…………………………………………………..28GGLOSSARY ……………………………………………………..49HHeating………………………………………………………….21HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL …………………………4Hydraulic pump ……………………………………………19Hydraulic pump control……………………………….26
diagram……………………………………………………..26Hysteresis ………………………………………………………49IIcons for emphasis: …………………………………………4Impulse duration ………………………………………….18INSTALLATION ……………………………………………….6Internal fan …………………………………………………..19INTRODUCTION ……………………………………………..5KKeyboard……………………………………………………….10Keyboards ……………………………………………………….5Keys ……………………………………………………………….10
Mode …………………………………………………………10LLed …………………………………………………………………10List of alarms ………………………………………………..40Load control………………………………………………….23Loads……………………………………………………………..49Low voltage outputs ………………………………………9MManual reset …………………………………………………49Menu structure……………………………………………..13OOperating modes ………………………………………….21
configuration table…………………………………..21OR logico ………………………………………………………49Outputs …………………………………………………………..9PParallel electrical heaters…………………………….27Param Manager ……………………………………………..5
PARAMETERS ………………………………………………. 31Parameters table…………………………………………. 36Permanent memory…………………………………….. 49Permitted use ………………………………………………. 47Phase shift……………………………………………………. 18Physical quantities and units of measurement
…………………………………………………………………….9Pick-up …………………………………………………………. 18Power outputs…………………………………………………9
Configuration table…………………………………….9Polarity Table ……………………………………………9
Power step……………………………………………………. 15Programming parameters – Menu levels …… 11Pump parameters ……………………………………….. 38RRange …………………………………………………………… 49Recording hours of operation …………………….. 28References ……………………………………………………….4Regulation algorithm in cool mode…………… 23Regulation algorithm in heat mode ………….. 23Regulations………………………………………………….. 46Remote keyboard………………………………………… 11Reset …………………………………………………………….. 49Reset alarm………………………………………………….. 49RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKS……… 48Reversing valve ……………………………………………. 19Reversing valve control……………………………….. 27Reversing valves…………………………………………… 19SSafety timing ……………………………………………….. 17Scroll down ………………………………………………….. 49Scroll up ………………………………………………………. 49selection ………………………………………………………….9Serial Interface (EWTK)…………………………………..5Serial outputs………………………………………………….9Set Point ………………………………………………………. 49Setting set points ………………………………………… 21Stand-by …………………………………………………21; 49SUMMARY ………………………………………………………2Supplementary electrical heaters ………………. 27SYSTEM CONFIGURATION………………………….. 15TTabella Allarmi……………………………………………. 41Technical data…………………………………………….. 46TECHNICAL FEATURES………………………………… 46TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONS……… 21UUnit of measurement: …………………………………….9USE OF THE DEVICE …………………………………….. 47USER INTERFACE …………………………………………. 10VVisibility of parameters and submenus ……… 14WWall-mounted keyboard…………………………….. 11
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 52
Microtech s.r.l.via dell’Industria, 15Zona Industriale Paludi32010 Pieve d’Alpago (BL)ITALY
Telephone +39 0437 986444Facsimile +39 0437 986163Email [email protected] http:/www.microtech.com
An Invensys company
electronic controller for Chiller/Heat pump up to 4 steps
technical user manual
ENERGY 400 -PRELIMINARY-
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 2
1 SUMMARY
1 SUMMARY …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………22 How to use this manual ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..43 Introduction ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………5
3.1 Components …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 53.1.1 Energy 400 ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.2 Extension……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………53.1.3 Keyboards………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….53.1.4 CF (Control Fan) Modules…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.5 Copy Card………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….53.1.6 Serial Interface (EWTK) ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..53.1.7 Param Manager ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..5
4 Installation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..64.1 Connection diagrams…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 64.2 Configuration of analogue inputs ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 64.3 Configuration of digital inputs……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 84.4 Configuration of outputs ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9
4.4.1 Power outputs………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….94.4.2 Low voltage outputs ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..94.4.3 Serial outputs…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..9
4.5 Physical quantities and units of measurement ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 9User Interface…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………10
5.1 Keys………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..105.2 Display …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10
5.2.1 Display……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..105.2.2 Led……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..10
5.3 Wall-mounted keyboard………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………115.4 Programming parameters – Menu levels……………………………………………………………………………………………………………115.5 Visibility of parameters and submenus………………………………………………………………………………………………………………14
5.5.1 Copy Card……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….14
6 System configuration………………………………………………………………………………………………………..156.1 Compressors ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….156.2 Compressor configuration……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………15
6.2.1 Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….166.2.2 Compressor timing ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..17
6.3 Condensation fan………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….186.3.1 Fan configuration………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..186.3.2 Fan control configuration ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..18
6.4 Reversing valves…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.5 Hydraulic pump…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.6 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters …………………………………………………………………………………………………….196.7 Internal fan……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………196.8 Condensation-Defrost probes……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..19
7 Temperature control functions………………………………………………………………………………………….217.1 Setting set points ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….217.2 Dynamic Set point ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..217.3 Load control ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….23
7.3.1 Compressor control – regulation algorithm ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..237.3.2 Condensation fan control ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..247.3.3 Combined or Separate Condensation………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….267.3.4 Hydraulic pump control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………267.3.5 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..277.3.6 Reversing valve control ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..27
8 Functions …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………288.1 Recording hours of operation ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………28
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 3
8.2 Defrost …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..288.2.1 Defrost start …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..288.2.2 Control during defrost……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….298.2.3 Defrost end …………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….29
9 Parameters ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………319.1 Description of Parameters ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………319.2 Parameters table…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..36
10 Diagnostics ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4010.1 List of alarms…………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………40
11 Technical features…………………………………………………………………………………………………………….4611.1 Technical data………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4611.2 Electromechanical features ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….4611.3 Regulations……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………46
12 Use of the device ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………4712.1 Permitted use ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..4712.2 Forbidden use………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..47
13 Responsibility and residual risks ………………………………………………………………………………………..4814 Glossary……………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………49
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 4
2 HOW TO USE THIS MANUALx
This manual is designed to permit quick, easy reference with the following features:
References column:A column to the left of the text contains references to subjects discussed in the text to help you locate the information youneed quickly and easily.
Cross references:All words written in italics are referenced in the subject index to help you find the page containing details on this subject;supposing you read the following text:”when the alarm is triggered, the compressors will be shut down”The italics mean that you will find a reference to the page on the topic of compressors listed under the item compressorsin the index.If you are consulting the manual “on-line” (using a computer), words which appear in italics are hyperlinks: just click on aword in italics with the mouse to go directly to the part of the manual that discusses this topic.
Some segments of text are marked by icons appearing in the references column with the meanings specified below:
Take note: information on the topic under discussion which the user ought to keep in mind
Tip: a recommendation which may help the user to understand and make use of the information supplied onthe topic under discussion.
Warning! : information which is essential for preventing negative consequences for the system or a hazard topersonnel, instruments, data, etc., and which users MUST read with care.
References
Cross references
Icons foremphasis:
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 5
3 INTRODUCTIONx
Energy 400 is a compact device that permits control of air conditioning units of the following types:• air-air• air-water• water-water• motor-condensing
The controller can manage machines with up to four power steps distributed in a maximum of 2 cooling circuits (forexample, 2 circuits, with 2 compressors per circuit).
Main characteristics:• Outflowing water temperature control• Condensation control• 2 inputs which may be configured for NTC or 4-20mA (through parameters)• 11 configurable digital inputs + (4 four optional)• Dynamic set point• Setting of parameters from the keyboard, with a personal computer or with a interface module• Remote keyboard (100 m) which may be connected up directly without serial interfaces.• 3 4-20 mA outputs• Control of 1, 2, 3, or 4 compressors.
3.1 Components
We will now look at the basic components and accessories in the system and how they are connected.
3.1.1 Energy 400The basic module is an electronic card for connection with I/O resources and a CPU as described in the section onconnection diagrams.
3.1.2 ExtensionThe basic module is an electronic card for connection as described in the section on connection diagrams.
3.1.3 KeyboardsTwo types of keyboard are available:• TS-P: Panel keyboard (32×74)• TS-W: Wall-mounted keyboard
3.1.4 CF (Control Fan) ModulesUsed to connect fans with Energy 400 low voltage outputs.
3.1.5 Copy CardCan be used to upload and download the Energy 400 parameter map.
3.1.6 Serial Interface (EWTK)A device which permits the controller to interface with a Personal Computer
It must be connected up as illustrated in the figure
The PC must be connected with the interface module, and the interface module with the device, with no poweron to any of the devices, and in compliance with current safetyregulations . Be careful to avoid electrostaticshocks, especially on exposed metal parts of the devices; allow electrostatic shocks to discharge into the groundbefore handling.
3.1.7 Param ManagerIf you have an adequate Personal Computer with Windows 95 or a more recent operating system, the Param Managersoftware, an adequate interface module and proper wiring, you can have full control over all Energy 400 parameters viaPersonal Computer.The instrument can be programmed easily and quickly using a series of interfaces which permit a logical, guided approach.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 6
4 INSTALLATIONx
Before proceeding with any operation, first make sure that you have connected up the power supply to thedevice through an appropriate external current trransformer.Always follow these rules when connecting boards to one another and to the application:Never apply loads which exceed the limits set forth in these specifications to outputs;Always comply with connection diagrams when connecting up loads;To prevent electrical couplings, always wire low voltage loads separately from high voltage loads;
4.1 Connection diagrams
Basic module
Detail of connectors
Instrument configuration is determined by the values of the parameters associated with inputs and outputs.
4.2 Configuration of analogue inputs
There are 6 analogue inputs:• 4 NTC transducers,• 2 configurable NTC/4-20mA transducers.
Analogue inputs
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 7
The following devices shall henceforth be referred to by the codes ST1….ST4:ST1 – Temperature control probe: inflowing water or air, reading range : -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST2 – Configurable probe, reading range: -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST3 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mAST4 — Configurable probe, reading range : -30°C ÷ 90°C;ST5 — Configurable NTC probe, 4-20mAST6 — Configurable probe, reading range: -30°C ÷ 90°C;
4 analogue inputs are available on the extension which is not used in this release.The resolution of NTC analogue inputs is one tenth of a Kelvin degree;They are precise to within 0.8°C within the range of 0÷35°C and to within 0.8°C ÷ 3°C in the remainder of the scale.The 4-20mA input is precise to within 1% FS, with a resolution of one tenth of a Kelvin degree, if the input is configured asa dynamic set point, or Kpa*10 if the input is configured as a pressure probe.
ST1-ST6 probes can be configured according to the following table:
Value Pa. Description 0 1 2 3 4 5
H11 Configuration ofanalogue inputST1
Probeabsent
NTC input inflowingwater or air
Digital inputrequest forheating
Digital inputrequest fortemperaturecontrol
DifferentialNTC input
Not permitted
H12 Configuration ofanalogue inputST2
Probeabsent
NTC inputoutflowingwater/air,anti-freeze
Digital inputrequest forcooling
Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted
H13 Configuration ofanalogue inputST3
Probeabsent
NTC inputcondensation
4…20 mAcondensationinput
4…20 mAinput fordynamic setpoint
NTCantifreeze forwater-watergas reversalmachines
NTC heatingcontrol forwater-waterwater reversalmachines
H14 Configuration ofanalogue inputST4
Probeabsent
NTC inputcondensation
Multifunctional digital input
NTC input foroutdoortemperature
Not permitted Not permitted
H15 Configuration ofanalogue inputST5
Probeabsent
NTC inputoutflowingwater/air
Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted Not permitted
H16 Configuration ofanalogue inputST6
Probeabsent
NTC inputcondensationcircuit 2
4-20mA inputcondensation
Not permitted Antifreezeinput forwater-watergas reversalmachines
Not permitted
If inputs ST3 and ST6 are defined as 4-20mA inputs under pressure, the scale bottom value of the pressure input is alsosignificant:Pa H17= Maximum input value; set the corresponding value to a current of 20 mA
Analogue inputs:resolution and
precision
Analogue inputs:configuration
table
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 8
4.3 Configuration of digital inputs
There are 11 voltage-free digital inputs, which will henceforth be identified as ID1….ID11.ST1, ST2, and ST4 may be added to these if they are configured as digital inputs (through parameters Pa H11, Pa H12, PaH14). 4 more digital inputs are available on the extension.
The polarity of digital inputs is determined by the parameters listed below:ID1, ID2, ID3, ID4 defined by parameter Pa H18,ID5, ID6, ID7, ID8 defined by parameter Pa H19ID9, ID10, ID11, ST4 (if configured as digital) defined by parameter Pa H20ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15 on extension defined by parameter Pa N01
ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8ID9 ID10 ID11 ST4
Pa H18Pa H19Pa H20Pa H21 ID12 ID13 ID14 ID15
0 Closed Closed Closed Closed1 Open Closed Closed Closed2 Closed Open Closed Closed3 Open Open Closed Closed4 Closed Closed Open Closed5 Open Closed Open Closed6 Closed Open Open Closed7 Open Open Open Closed8 Closed Closed Closed Open9 Open Closed Closed Open10 Closed Open Closed Open11 Open Open Closed Open12 Closed Closed Open Open13 Open Closed Open Open14 Closed Open Open Open15 Open Open Open Open
Example: A value of “10” for parameter Pa H18 indicates that digital inputs ID1 and ID3 are active when their contacts areclosed and digital inputs ID2 and ID4 are active when their contacts are open:
Pa H18 ID1 ID2 ID3 ID410 Closed Open Closed Open
If ST1 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter Pa H21If ST2 is configured as digital, its polarity is defined by parameter Pa H22
Parameter Value Description
0 Active if closed1 Active if open
All digital inputs are configurable and may be given the meanings listed below by setting parameters Pa H23 through PaH34 and Pa N02 through Pa N05
Parameter Value Description
0 Input disabled1 Flow switch2 Remote OFF3 Remote Heat/Cool4 Thermal switch compressor 15 Thermal switch compressor 26 Thermal switch compressor 37 Thermal switch compressor 48 Thermal switch fan circuit 19 Thermal switch fan circuit 210 High pressure circuit 111 High pressure circuit 212 Low pressure circuit 113 Low pressure circuit 214 High pressure compressor 115 High pressure compressor 216 High pressure compressor 317 High pressure compressor 418 End of defrost circuit 119 End of defrost circuit 2
In the case of multiple inputs configured with the same value, the function associated with the input will carry out aLogical OR among the inputs.
Digital inputs
Digital inputs:polarity
Digital inputs:Polarity table
Digital inputs:Configuration
Table
Outputs
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 9
4.4 Configuration of outputs
There are two basic types of outputs: power outputs, and low voltage outputs.
4.4.1 Power outputsThere are 8 power outputs, which shall henceforth be referred to as RL1…RL8 (relays).RL1 — compressor 1, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL2 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL3 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL4 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL5 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL6 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL7 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL8 – cumulative alarm, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
There are 2 additional digital outputs in the extension module:RL9 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;RL10 — configurable, 5 A 125VAC/230VAC Res; ¼ HP 230VAC, 1/8 HP 125VAC;
Configurable outputs may be given the following meanings by setting parameters Pa H35 through Pa H40 and Pa N06through Pa N07
Value Description0 Disabled1 Reversal valve circuit 12 Reversal valve circuit 23 Condenser fan circuit 14 Condenser fan circuit 25 Electrical heater 16 Electrical heater 27 Pump8 Evaporator fan9 Power Step 210 Power Step 311 Power Step 4
Polarity of RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5,RL8 may be selected using Pa H41-Pa H45
Parameter Value Description
0 Relay closed if output active1 Relay open if output not active
If multiple outputs are configured with the same resource, the outputs will be activated in parallel.
4.4.2 Low voltage outputsThere are a total of 4 low voltage outputs available: 2 phase cut outputs and 2 4-20 mA outputs:TK1 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 1.TK2 – Output for piloting external fan control modules in circuit 2.AN1 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 1AN2 — 4-20mA output for control of fans in circuit 2
Outputs AN1 and AN2, though their connections are physically separate, are alternatives to outputs TK1 and TK2 which areselected by parameters Pa H45 and Pa H46
Fan config. parameter Index Value 0 Value 1
Fan 1 output H45 Fan 1 output in phase cut Fan 1 output in 4-20 mAFan 2 output H46 Fan 2 output in phase cut Fan 2 output in 4-20 mA
4.4.3 Serial outputsThere are 2 asynchronous serials on the control:• channel for serial communication with a personal computer through a Microtech interface module• channel for serial communication with a standard Microtech keyboard. Power supply 12 VDC (2400,e,8,1).
4.5 Physical quantities and units of measurement
Parameter Pa H64 may be used to set temperature display in either degrees °C or degrees °F:
Pa H64 Unit ofmeasurement
0 Degrees °C1 Degrees °F
Configurationtable
Polarity Table
Configuration offan outputs
Unit ofmeasurement:
selection
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 10
5 USER INTERFACEx
The interface on the front panel of the instrument can be used to carry out all the operations connected to the use of theinstrument, and in particular to:• Set operating mode• Respond to alarm situations• Check the state of resources
Front panel of the instrument
The instrument can function without the aid of a keyboard
5.1 Keys
Selects operating mode:
If the heating mode is enabled, each time the key is pressed the following sequence occurs:Stand-by -àà cooling àà heating àà stand-by
if heating mode is not enabled:Stand-by àà cooling àà stand-by
In menu mode, this key acts as a SCROLL UP or UP key (increasing value).
Resets alarms, and turns the instrument on and off.
Press once to reset all manually reset alarms not currently active; all the alarm events per hour will also be reset even if thealarms are not active.Hold down the key for 2 seconds to turn the instrument from on to off or vice versa. When it is off, only the decimal pointremains on the display. In menu mode this key acts as a SCROLL DOWN or DOWN key (decreasing value).
Pressing the “mode” and “on-off” keys at the same time:
If you press both keys at the same time and then release within 2 seconds, you will move one level deeper in the displaymenu.If you press both keys for more than 2 seconds you will move one level up.If you are currently viewing the lowest level in the menu and you press both keys and release within 2 seconds, you will goup one level.
5.2 Display
The device can communicate information of all kinds on its status, configuration, and alarms through a display and anumber of leds on its front panel.
5.2.1 DisplayNormal display shows:• regulation temperature in tenths of degrees celsius or fahrenheit• the alarm code, if at least one alarm is active. If multiple alarms are active, the one with greater priority will be
displayed, according to the Table of Alarms.• If temperature control is not analogue and depends on the status of a digital input (ST1 or ST2 configured as digital
inputs), the “On” or “Off” label will be displayed, depending on whenther temperature control is active or not.• When in menu mode, the display depends on the current position; labels and codes are used to help the user identify
the current function.
5.2.2 LedLed 1 compressore 1.ON if compressor 1 is active• OFF if compressor 1 if off• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if compressor is currently set to defrost
Power step 2 ledON if power step 2 is active
Keyboard
Mode
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 11
• OFF if power step 2 is not active• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if step 2 is currently defrosting
Led step 3 di potenzaON se lo step 3 di potenza è attivo• OFF se lo step 3 di potenza non è attivo• BLINK veloce se sono in corso temporizzazioni di sicurezza• BLINK lento se step 3 in sbrinamento
Power step 4 led• ON if power step 4 is active• OFF if power step 4 is not active• Rapid BLINK if safety timing is in progress• Slow BLINK if step 4 is defrosting
Electrical heater/boiler led• ON if at least one internal anti-freeze electrical heater or boiler is enabled• OFF if both are off
Heating Led• ON if the device is in heating mode.
Cooling Led• ON if the controller is in cooling mode
If neither the HEATING led nor the COOLING led are in, the controller is in STAND-BY mode.When it is off, only the decimal point appears on the display .
5.3 Wall-mounted keyboard
The remote keyboard a on the display is an exact copy of the information displayed on the instrument, with the same leds;Remote keyboard
It performs exactly the same functions as those described in the display section.The only difference is in use of the UP and DOWN keys (to increase and decrease value), which are separate from theMODE and ON/OFF keys.
5.4 Programming parameters – Menu levels
Device parameters may be modified using a Personal Computer (with the required software, interface key and cables), orusing the keyboard;If using the keyboard, access to parameters is arranged in a hierarchy of levels which may be accessed by pressing the“mode and “on-off” keys at the same time (as described above).Each menu level is identified by a mnemonic code which appears on the display.The structure is set up as shown in the diagram below:
Remote keyboard
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 13
Menu structure
Control probeCurrent alarm
Set point:
Analogue Inp.:
Alarms:
Digital input:
Op. hours:
Password:
Parameters:
Label cooling set:
Label heating set:
Input code.: —
Current alarms Code:
Input code: —
Value heating set
Value cooling set
Configuration par.:
Compressor par.:
Fan control par.:
Alarms par.:
Pump par.:
Antifreeze par.:
Defrost par.:
Par. index —
Parameter value
Number of hours par.
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Parameter value
Comp. hours: —
Password value
Status of digital input
Val. analogue input
Par. index —
Par. index —
Par. index —
Par. index —
Par. index —
Par. index —
Pump hours: Number of hours par.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 14
5.5 Visibility of parameters and submenus
With a personal computer, interface key, suitable cables and the “Param Manager” software, it is possible to restrict thevisibility and modification of parameters and entire submenus.A “visibility value” may be assigned to each parameter, as described below:
Value Meaning0003 Parameter or label visible at all times0258 Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password = Pa
H46)0770 Parameter or label visible if user password entered correctly (password = Pa
H46). Parameter cannot be modified.0768 Parameter visible from PC only.
Some visibility settings are factory set.For more information, please refer to the “ Param Manager” instructions.
5.5.1 Copy Card
The copy card can store the whole map of Energy 400 parameters;To download the map present in the copy card, proceed as follows:1. Connect the key to the appropriate Energy 400 output (refer to connection diagrams) while the device is off.2. Turn on the Energy 400 : the parameters map in the copy card will be copied to the Energy 400.
To store the Energy 400 parameters map in memory, proceed as follows:1. Connect the copy card to the appropriate Energy 400 output (refer to connection diagrams) while the device is on.2. From the keyboard, access the “password” submenu (refer to menu structure) and set the value contained in
parameter Pa H46: The instrument’s map will be downloaded to the copy card.3. Disconnect the copy card when finished.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 15
6 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONx
In this section we will look at how to configure parameters for various loads on the basis of the type of installation to becontrolled.
6.1 Compressors
Energy 400 can control systems consisting of up to two cooling circuits with 1 to 4 compressors.If there is a capacity step, it will be considered as a compressor.Each compressor is piloted by a device relay (power outputs) (each capacity step requires an additional output).The first compressor must be connected to output RL1; the remaining outputs (RL2…RL7) (RL9…RL10 on extension) may beassigned at will, setting the value of the parameters Pa H35 …. PaH40 (Pa N06 … Pa N07 if there is no extension).The compressors will be turned on or off depending on the temperatures detected and the temperature control functionsthat have been set (refer to the section on Compressor controls – Regulation algorithml )
6.2 Compressor configuration
The turning on of an additional compressor (or capacity step) will henceforth be referred to as a Power step (power level).
The following configurations are available for compressors without capacity steps:
Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1) 2 (Pa H06=2) 3 (Pa H06=3) 4 (Pa H06=4)
1(Pa
H05=1)
RL1=comp. 1 circ.1 RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2circ.1Step3 = comp 3circ.1
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1Step3 = comp 3 circ.1Step4 = comp 4 circ.1
Num
ber o
f circ
uits
2(Pa
H05=2)
RL1=Comp. 1 circ.1Step3 = comp. 1 circ.2
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = comp 2 circ.1Step3 = comp 1 circ.2Step4 = comp 2 circ.2
Configuration error Configuration error
The following configurations are available for compressors with 1 capacity step (Pa H07=1):
Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1) 2 (Pa H06=2)
1(Pa
H05=1)
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 Comp.1 circ.1Step3 = comp.2 circ.1Step4 = cap. step1 Comp.2 circ.1
Num
ber o
f circ
uits
2(Pa
H05=2)
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step3 = comp.1 circ.2Step4 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.2
Configuration error
The following configurations are available for compressors with 2 or 3 capacity steps (Pa H07=2 or Pa H07=3):
Number of compressors per circuit1 (Pa H06=1 and Pa H07=2) 2 (Pa H06=2 and Pa H07=3)
1(Pa
H05=1)
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step4 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1
RL1=comp. 1 circ. 1Step2 = cap. step1 comp.1 circ.1Step3 = cap. step2 comp.1 circ.1Step4 = cap. step3 comp.1 circ.1
Num
bero
of c
ircui
ts
2(pa
H05=2)
Configuration error Configuration error
Power step
Simplecompressors
with 1 capacitystep
with 2 or 3capacity steps
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 16
6.2.1 Compressor (or power step) on/off sequencesDepending on the temperature conditions detected by the probes, the temperature control functions of the “Energy 400”may request turning on and off of compressors/capacity steps (power steps).The sequence in which compressors/capacity steps (steps) are turned on and off may be determined by adjusting thevalues of parameters Pa H08 and Pa H09 as described below:
Parameter valuePar Description 0 1
Pa H08 Power step on sequence Depends on number of hours ofoperation
Unvaried on sequence
Pa H09 Circuit balacing Circuit saturation Circuit balancing
When on sequences depend on the number of hours of operation, of 2 available compressors, the one which has beenoperated for less hours will come on first, and the one which has been operated for more hours will always go off first. Inan unvaried on sequence, the compressor with the lower number will always come on first (compressor 1 beforecompressor 2) and the compressor with the higher number will always go off first.
The circuit balancing parameter is significant only if there are 2 circuits and 2 steps per circuit. If we select H09=0, allpower steps in one circuit will come on before those in the other circuit. If H09=1 (balancing), power steps will come on insuch a way that both circuits are delivering the same power, or the difference is no more than one step.
Let us take a closer look at the various combinations:
Pa H08=0 Pa H09=0CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER
CIRCUIT:CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUIT:
The compressor with the least hours of operation comes onfirst, then the capacity step for the same circuit, thecompressor on the other circuit, and, lastly, its capacity step.When turning off, the capacity step of the compressor withthe most hours of operation goes off first, then thecorresponding compressor, then the other capacity step andfinally the other compressor.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2Ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep4ààRL1ààStep2and go off in this orderStep2ààRL1ààStep4ààStep3
If all compressors are off to start with, the circuit which hasthe lower average number of hours for all its compressorswill come on first. In this circuit the compressor with theleast hours of operation will come on first, followed by theother compressor in the same circuit: thus the circuit issaturated. The next step is chosen between the twocompressors in the other circuit with fewer hours.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2Ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2hours comp.4 > hours comp.3(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 +hours comp.3)/2 they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep4ààStep2ààRL1and go off in this orderRL1ààStep2ààStep4ààStep3
Pa H08=0 and Pa H09=1CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER
CIRCUIT:CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUIT
The compressor with the least hours of operation comes onfirst, followed by the compressor in the other circuit, thecapacity step of the first circuit to come on, and, lastly, theother capacity step. When going off, the capacity step of thecompressor with the most hours goes off first, followed bythe capacity step of the other compressor, the compressorwith the most hours and, lastly, the remaining compressor.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2they will come on in this orderStep3ààRL1ààStep4ààStep2and go off in this orderStep2ààStep4ààRL1ààStep3
If all compressors are off to start with, the circuit with thelower average number of hours for its compressors will comeon first. The average is calculated as the ratio between thetotal number of hours of the compressors available and thenumber of compressors in the circuit. In this circuit, thecompressor with the least hours will come on first, then thecompressor in the other circuit with the least hours, theother compressor in the first circuit and, lastly, theremaining compressor.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as followsRL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = compressor 2 circuit 1Step3 = compressor 3 circuit 2Step4 = compressor 4 circuit 2ifhours comp.1 > hours comp.2hours comp.4 > hours comp.3(hours comp.1 + hours comp.2)/2>(hours comp.4 +hours comp.3)/2 they will come on in this orderStep3ààStep2ààStep4ààRL1and go off in this orderRL1ààStep4ààStep2ààStep3
Compressors:coming on on thebasis of hours of
operation andcircuit saturation
Compressors:coming on on thebasis of hours of
operation andcircuit balancing
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 17
Pa H08=1 and Pa H09=0CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUITThe compressor con with the lower number comes on first,then its capacity step, then the compressor in the othercircuit and, lastly, its capacity step. The capacity step for thecompressor with the highest number is the first to go off,followed by the capacity step of the other compressor, andfinally the compressor.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2they will come on in this orderRL1ààStep2ààStep3ààStep4and go off in this orderStep4ààStep3ààStep2ààRL1
Exactly the same as the first case.
Pa H08=1 e Pa H09=1CASE OF 1 COMPRESSOR WITH CAPACITY STEP PER CIRCUIT CASE OF 2 COMPRESSORS PER CIRCUITThe compressor with the lowest number comes on first,then the compressor in the other circuit, the capacity stepof the first compressor and then the capacity step of thesecond compressor. They go off in reverse order.
Example:Supposing the system has been configured as follows:RL1=Compressor 1 circuit 1Step2 = capacity step compressor 2Step3 = compressor 2 circuit 2Step4 = capacity step compressor 2they will come on in this orderRL1ààStep3ààStep2ààStep4and go off in this orderStep4ààStep2ààStep3ààRL1
Exactly the same as the first case.
In the unvaried sequence, if the compressor with the lower number is unavailable, the compressor with the higher numbercomes on.If the compressor comes available and the amount of power required is equal to the amount of power being delivered,the machine will continue to function in its current state: it will not turn off a compressor with a higher number to turn ona compressor with a lower number.
A compressor is unavailable when it is shut down due to an alarm or is currently counting safety timing.
6.2.2 Compressor timingThe turning on and off of compressors must comply with safety times which may be set by the user using the parametersspecified below:
There is a safety interval between the time a compressor goes off and the time the same compressor comes back on(compressor on…off safety time, controlled by parameter Pa C01);This interval of time must elapse when the “Energy 400” is turned on.
There is a safety interval between the time a compressor is turned on and the time it is turned on again (compressoron…on safety time, controlled by parameter Pa C02) .
If the machine has multiple power steps, there are intervals of time which must pass between turning on of 2 compressors(Pa C06) and turning off of 2 compressors (Pa C07). An amount of time determined by parameter Pa C08 (capacity step ondelay) must elapse between the turning on of one compressor or capacity step and the turning on of any other
Compressors:unvaried on
sequence withcircuit saturation
Compressors:unvaried on
sequence withcircuit balancing
Safety timing
Off-on timing
On-on timing
Off-on and on-ondiagram for 1
compressor
On-on off-offtimes for 2 comp.
Compressor
ON
OFF
OFF – ON safety timePa C01
Seconds*10
ON – ON safety timePa C02
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 18
compressor or capacity step on the machine. The greatest of the currently active safety times must be applied to eachcompressor.The off time interval between compressors is not applied in the event of a compressor shutdown alarm, in which casethey stop immediately.
6.3 Condensation fan
“Energy 400” may be connected with two types of fan piloting unit:
• Triak• 4-20 mA
6.3.1 Fan configurationFirst of all, correctly configure the type of analogue output (low voltage outputs) to which the fan control module(s) areconnected;the relevant parameters are Pa H45 for the first circuit and Pa H46 for the second circuit, as shown in the table below:
Parameter value Circuit 1 – Pa H45 Circuit 2 – Pa H460 TK output enabled for phase
cutTK output enabled for phasecut
1 Enable 4-20 mA output AN1 Enable 4-20 mA output AN2
If the output is configured as a proportional triac, the parameters PICK-UP, PHASE SHIFT, and IMPULSE DURATION are alsosignificant.
Every time the external fan is started up, power is supplied to the exchanger fan at maximum voltage, and the fan operatesat maximum speed, for an amount of time equal to Pa F02 seconds; after this time the fan operates at the speed set bythe regulator.Pa F02 = Fan pick-up time (seconds)
Determines a delay during which it is possible to compensate the different electrical characteristics of the fan drivemotors:Pa F03 = duration of fan phase shift expressed as a percentage.
Determines the duration of the TK output piloting impulse in microseconds*10Pa F04= triak piloting impulse duration
6.3.2 Fan control configurationThe fan control may be configured to supply a proportionate output (0-100%) or to function as “ON OFF” by setting thevalue of the parameter Pa F01:
Pa F01 = Selection of control output typePa F01 = 0 proportionate fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on
parameters)Pa F01 = 1 fan “on-off” output; in this mode the control performs the same
calculations as in proportionate output, but if the outcome isgreater than 0, the control output will be 100.
Pa F01 = 2 on-off operation as called by compressor. In this mode output is 0if no compressor is on in the circuit, or 100% if at least onecompressor in the circuit is on
on-on and off-offdiagram 2 comp
Pick-up
Phase shift
Impulse duration
Fan configuration:selection ofoutput type
Comp.1
ON
OFF
Interval betweenturning offcompressors Pa C07
Seconds
Interval between turning oncompressors Pa C05
Comp.2ON
OFF
Seconds
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 19
If some of the relays are configured as condensation fan outputs (Pa H35- Pa H40 and Pa N06- Pa N07=3 or 4), they willbe on if the control output for each fan is greater than 0; otherwise, they will be off.
6.4 Reversing valves
The reversing valve is used only when operating in “heat pump” mode.“Energy 400” can control up to 2 reversing valves in a dual circuit system.
The reversing valve in circuit 1 is active only if:• a relay (power output) is configured as reversing valve for circuit 1 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 1).
The reversing valve in circuit 2 is active only if:• a relay (power output) is configured as reversing valve for circuit 2 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06 and Pa N07= 2)• there are 2 circuits
Both of them will be active only ifthe heat pump is in operation (Pa H10=1 )
6.5 Hydraulic pump
The hydraulic pump is active only if at least one relay (power output) is configured as pump output (Pa H35-Pa H40 or PaN06-Pa N07= 7 ) .
The pump may be configured to function independently of the compressor or whenever called up using parameter Pa P01 :
Pa P01 = Pump operating mode0=continuous operation1=operation when called up by regulation algorithm
with a flow switch alarm (table of alarms) which is active with automatic reset, the pump will be on even if the compressisoff.
6.6 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters
“Energy 400” can control up to 2 anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters.
The electrical heater output is active only if the relays (power outputs) are configured as electrical heaters 1 or 2 (Pa H35-Pa H40 or Pa N06-Pa N07= 5 or 6) .If configured in this way, the outputs will command the electrical heater to come on or go off, depending on theparameters of configuration of electrical heaters Pa R01 … Pa R06, as described below:
ValueParameter Description0 1
Pa R01 Defrost configuration comes on only when requested bycontrol
always on during defrost
Pa R02 Cooling modeconfiguration
off during cooling on during cooling (depending on anti-freeze electrical heater control)
Pa R03 Heating modeconfiguration
off during heating on during heating (depending on anti-freeze electrical heater control)
Pa R06 OFF or STAND-BYconfiguration
off when OFF or on STAND-BY Electrical heaters on when OFF or onSTAND-BY
Parameters r04 and r05 determine which probe the electrical heaters will control.Each of the two electrical heaters may be set to any one of probes ST1, ST2 or ST5.If the is absent or configured as a digital input, the electrical heaters will always be off.
Pa r04 configuration probe set to electrical heater 1Pa r05 configuration probe set to electrical heater 2
ValueParameters
Description
0 Electrical heater off1 Set to ST12 Set to ST23 Set to ST5
6.7 Internal fan
The fan output will be active only if one relay is configured as evaporator fan output.The output is ON if at least one compressor is ON; otherwise it is off. During defrost the output is always off.
6.8 Condensation-Defrost probes
“Energy 400” can control defrosting of one or more circuits depending on system configuration.
Defrost is enabled if:• stated by the “Enable defrost” parameter (Pa d01 = 1)
Reversing valve
configuration
probeconfiguration
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 20
• the condensation probe for circuit 1 is present (connected to analogue input ST3) and the relative parameter Pa H13= 1 (in the case of an NTC probe) or Pa H13 = 2 (in the case of a 4-20mA probe) and ST4 = 1
• the reversing valve is present
In the case of a dual circuit system, defrost may be separate or combined (this will be the case of a system with a singlecondenser) depending on the setting of the parameterPa F22 : condensation type
0 1Pa F22: condensation type Separate condensers Combined condensation
Defrost end and start depends on the values of the condensation probes, which may be configured as follows:
Let SCC1 be the condensation probe of circuit 1; it may be connected to analogue input ST3 or ST4;depending on the type of probe, the configuration will be as shown in the table below:
Probe connectionProbe type Probe connected to
ST3Probe connected toST4
SCC1 NTC type Pa H13 = 1 Pa H14 = 1SCC1 4-20mA type Pa H13 = 2 —
The following table applies to a dual circuit system:
1 circuit 2 circuits, separatedefrost
2 circuits, combineddefrost (*)
Defrost circuit 1 SCC1 SCC1 MIN(SCC1;ST6)Defrost circuit 2 — ST6 MIN(SCC1;ST6)
(*) If A and B are control probes, MIN(A;B) representsthe smaller of A and B, if A and B are declared present.It will be value A if B is not declared present.It is impossible for A not to be declared present.
separate orcombined
condensation
probeconfiguration
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 21
7 TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONSx
Once ”Energy 400” has been configured, loads may be controlled on the basis of temperature and pressure conditionsdetected by probes and temperature control functions which may be defined using the appropriate parameters.
There are 4 possible operating modes:• cooling• heating• stand-by• off
Cooling: this is the “summer” operating mode; the machine is configured for cooling.
Heating: this is the “winter” operating mode; the machine is configured for heating.
Stand-by: the machine does not govern any temperature control function; it continues to signal alarms
Off: machine is turned off.
The operating mode is determined by settings entered on the keyboard and by the following
Parameters:Configuration parameter ST1 (Pa H11) ( refer to Analogue inputs: configuration table)Configuration parameter ST2 (Pa H12) ( refer to Analogue inputs: configuration table)Operating mode selection parameter (Pa H49)Heat pump parameter (Pa H10 )
Operating mode selection parameter (Pa H49)0= Selection from keyboard1= Selection from digital input (refer to digital inputs)
Heat pump parameter (Pa H10)0 = Heat pump not present1 = Heat pump present
Combinations of these parameters will generate the following rules:
Operating mode Mode selectionparameterPa H49
Configurationparameter ST1Pa H11
Configurationparameter ST2Pa H12
Mode selection from keyboard 0 Other than 2 Other than 2Mode selection from digital input. 1 Other than 2 Other than 2If input ST1 is on, operating mode is heating; ifnot, stand-by
Any 2 Other than 2
If input ST2 is on, operating mode is cooling; ifnot, stand-by
Any Other than 2 2
If input ST1 is on, operating mode is heating; ifinput ST2 is on, operating mode is cooling; if ST1and ST2 are both on, there is a control error; ifneither is on, operating mode is stand-by
Any 2 2
7.1 Setting set points
Unless the machine is configured as a motor condenser, loads will come on and go off dynamically depending on thetemperature control functions set, the temperature/pressure values detected by the probes, and the set points that havebeen set:
There are two set point values:Cooling Set point: this is the set point used as a reference when the device is in cooling modeHeating Set point: this is the set point used as a reference when the device is in heating mode
The set points may be modified from the keyboard by accessing the “SET” submenu (refer to menu structure).
Their values must fall within a range determined by parameters Pa H02 – Pa H01 (Heating) and Pa H04 – Pa H03 (Cooling).
7.2 Dynamic Set point
The regulation algorithm may be used to modify the set point automatically on the basis of outdoor conditions.This modification is achieved by adding a positive or negative offset value to the set point, depending on:• 4-20 mA analogue input (proportionate to a signal set by the user)or• temperature of outdoor probe
This function has two purposes: to save energy, or to operate the machine under particularly harsh outdoor temperatureconditions.
The dynamic set point is active if:• Activation parameter Pa H50 = 1
Operating modes
Cooling
Heating
Stand-by
Device off
Operating modes:configuration
table
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 22
• Probe ST3 (analogue inputs) is configured as a dynamic set point input (Pa H13 = 3) or probe ST4 (analogue inputs) isconfigured as an outdoor probe (Pa H14 = 3)
Parameters for control of the dynamic set point:• Pa H51= max. offset during cooling.• Pa H52= max. offset during heating• Pa H53= Outdoor temperature set point during cooling• Pa H54= Outdoor temperature set point during heating• Pa H55= Delta of cooling temperature• Pa H56= Delta of heating temperature
The interaction of these parameters is illustrated in the graphs below:
Positive Offset (H32>0 or H33>0)
Negative Offset (H32<0 or H33<0)
Positive Offset
Controlparameters
Modificationdepending on
current input withpositive offset
Modificationdepending on
current input withnegative offset
Modificationdepending on
outdoortemperature with
positive offset
OffsetSet point
Current20 mA4 mA
Maxoffset
Current
20 mA4 mA
Maxoffset
Temp.
Delta <0
Outdoor temp. setpoint (H53 orH54)
Delta >0
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 23
Offset Negativo
7.3 Load control
We will now look at how to set parameters for load control on the basis of temperature/pressure conditions detected byprobes.
7.3.1 Compressor control – regulation algorithmThe regulation algorithm calculates the load to be supplied through the compressors for both heating and cooling.
REGULATION ALGORITHM IN COOL MODEIf probe ST2 (analogue inputs) is not configured as a digital input for requests for cooling (Pa H11=2) or probeST1(analogue inputs) as a digital input for regulation algorithm requests (Pa H12=3), compressor management willdepend on ambient temperature and a SET POINT.
ST1 = temperature of inflowing water or inlet airSET COOL= cooling set point set from keyboard.Pa C03 = hysteresis of cooling thermostatPa C05 = delta of power step intervention
If Pa H011 = 3, the power step requested will depend on the status of input ST1 (analogue inputs).If Pa H012 = 2, the power step requested will depend on the status of input ST2 (analogue inputs).If probe ST5 (analogue inputs) is configured as a second step request (Pa H15 =2), the second step (power step) will berequested on the basis of this input. This function will be active only if either Pa H11=3 or Pa H12=2.Only motor condensers may be controlled, up to 2 steps only.
REGULATION ALGORITHM IN HEAT MODEIf probe ST1(analogue inputs) is not configured as a digital input for requests for heat (Pa H05=2) or digital input forrequests for regulation algorithm (Pa H05=3), compressor management will depend on• temperature ST3 (analogue inputs), if configuration parameter ST3 = 5 (for water/water manual reversal machines)• otherwise, temperature ST1(analogue inputs)• a HEATING set point which may be set from the keyboard
ST1/ST3 =Temperature of inflowing water or inlet air
Modificationdepending on
outdoortemperature with
negative offset
Regulationalgorithm in cool
mode
Cooling diagram
Regulationalgorithm in heat
mode
Temp.
Delta <0
Outdoor temp. setpoint. (H53 orH54)
Delta >0
Power
1st step
ST1Pa C03 Pa C03
2nd step
Pa C05 Pa C05 Pa C05
Pa C03 Pa C03
3rd step
4th step
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 24
HEATING SET = Heating set point that has been setPa C04 = Heating thermostat hysteresisPa C05 = Delta of step intervention
If Pa H11 = 2-3, the compressors will be turned off and on depending on the status of input ST1.If probe ST5 (analogue inputs) is configured as a second step request (Pa H15 =2), the second step (power step) will berequested depending on this input. This function will be active only if Pa H11=2,3 or Pa H12=2.
DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE CONTROLThis function may be used to control temperature according to both ST1(analogue inputs) and ST4 (analogue inputs). Thefunction will be active• if ST1 is configured as differential NTC input (Pa H11 = 4)• if ST4 is configured as outdoor temperature input (Pa H14 = 3)
In this case, the controller will not control on the basis of ST1, but on the basis of the difference between ST1-ST4; ifconfiguration parameter ST3 is equal to 5 (for water/water machines with manual reversal) in heating mode the controllerwill always control on the basis of ST3.Differential temperature control can be used, for instance, to maintain a constant difference in temperature between theoutdoor environment and a liquid being heated or cooled.
A compressor will always be off if:• It is not associated with a relay (power output)• The compressor has been shut down (refer to table of alarms)• Safety timing is in progress• The time lapse between pump on and compressor on is in progress (safety timing)• Preventilation is in progress in cooling mode• Energy 400 is in stand-by or off mode• The parameter for configuration of probe ST1 Pa H11 = 0 (probe absent)
7.3.2 Condensation fan controlCondensation control is dependent on the condensation temperature or pressure for the circuit.Fan control will be on if:• at least one probe per circuit is configured as a condensation probe (pressure or temperature); if not, the fan for the
circuit will come ON and go OFF in response to the circuit compressors.
Fan control may be independent of the compressor, or it may be carried out in response to requests from compressors;Operating mode is determined by parameter Pa F05:
Value0 1
Pa F05:fan output mode
if all compressors in the circuit are off,the fan is off
condensation control is independentof the compressor
The cut-off is bypassed for an amount of time equal to Pa F12 after the compressor is turned on. If the control requestscut-off during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.
If parameter Pa F05 is set to 1, condensation control will be dependent on condensation temperature or pressure,depending on how the following parameters are set:
CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL IN COOL MODEPa F06 = Minimum fan speed in COOL mode;Pa F07 = Maximum silent fan speed in COOL modePa F08 = Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in COOL modePa F09 = Fan prop. band in COOL mode
Heating diagram
Differentialtemperature control
Cool mode
Power
1st step
Pa C03 Pa C03
2nd step
Pa C05 Pa C05
Pa C03 Pa C03
3rd step
4th step
ST1/ST3
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 25
Pa F10 = Fan cut-off deltaPa F11 = Cut-off hysteresis.Pa F13 = Maximum fan speed in COOL modePa F14 = Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in COOL modeAn example of interaction of these parameters is shown in the figure below:
Fan control in cool mode
In cooling mode only, if Pa F05= 0 (if the compressor is turned off the fan is off), parameter Pa F21 (preventilation timefor outdoor fan) is active.Before turning on the compressors in the circuit the fan must be turned on for an amount of time equal to Pa F25; fanspeed is proportionate to condensation temperature, but if the control requests cut-off during this time period the fan willrun at the minimum speed setting.
This parameter prevents the compressor from starting up with a condensation temperature that is too high.
CONDENSATION FAN CONTROL IN HEAT MODEPa F15 = Minimum fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F16 = Maximum silent fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F17 = Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in HEAT mode;Pa F18 = Fan prop. band in HEAT mode;Pa F10 = Fan cut-off delta;Pa F11 = Cut-off hysteresis;Pa F19 = Maximum fan speed in HEAT mode;Pa F20 = Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point in HEAT mode.An example of interaction of these parameters is shown in the figure below:
Fan control in heat mode
Fan control in coolmode: diagram
Heat mode
Fan control inheat mode:
diagram
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 26
If circuit is in defrost mode, the fan is OFF.
The cut-off is bypassed for an amount of time equal to Pa F12 after the compressor is turned on. If the control requests cut-off during this time period, the fan will run at minimum speed.
The fan will always be off if: there is an alarm indicating that a condensation fan has shut down (refer to table of alarms).Energy 400 is on stand-by or off.
7.3.3 Combined or Separate CondensationParameter Pa F22 may be used to configure a dual circuit machine with a combined condenser.
Value0 1
Pa F22:condensation type
separate condensers combined condenser
If Pa F22 = 0 the two fans are independent and are controlled by condensation pressure/temperature and the status of thecompressors in the circuits.If Pa F22= 1 the outputs of the 2 fans are in parallel and will be controlled as follows:by the greater of the condensation probes in the circuits in cooling modeby the smaller of the condensation probes in the circuits in heating mode
If one of the 2 circuits does not have a condensation probe a configuration alarm will be generated (refer to table ofalarms).
7.3.4 Hydraulic pump controlIf the pump is configured for continuous operation (Pa P01 = 0) it will stay on at all times; if not (Pa P01 = 1) it will beturned on in response to a request from the regulation algorithm.
Interaction between the pump, the compressors and the regulation algorithm status is determined by the followingparameters:
• Pa P02: Delay between pump on and compressors on.• Pa P03: Delay between regulation algorithm off and pump off.
An example is provided in the diagram below:
Errore. Il collegamento non è valido.
During a defrost, when the compressor is off, the pump will stay on.
The pump will go off if:• There is a pump shut-down alarm, such as a flow switch alarm requiring manual reset (refer to table of alarms)
diagram
Reg. algorithm
Compressor
ON
OFF
Pump
ON
OFF
Time
TimeDelay between compressor offand pump offPa P03
Delay between pump onand compressor onPa P02
ON
OFFTime
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 27
• The instrument is on stand-by or off (it goes off after the delay determined by Pa P03)
7.3.5 Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heater controlEnergy 400 can control 2 anti-freeze electrical heaters;Each electrical heater is controlled with its own set point, which is different for heating and cooling modes, by means ofthe following parameters :• Pa r07 : set point of electrical heater 1 in heating mode• Pa r08 : set point of electrical heater 1 in cooling mode• Pa r13 : set point of electrical heater 2 in heating mode• Pa r14 : set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling mode
The two set points of the anti-freeze electrical heaters fall within a maximum and a minimum value which the user may setin the form of the following parameters:• Pa r09 : maximum set point for anti-freeze electrical heater• Pa r10 : minimum set point for anti-freeze electrical heater
When off or on stand-by. control is based on the cooling set point and the control probe used in heating mode.
Parameter Pa R11 determines hysteresis around the set points for the anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters.
An example of operation is shown in the diagram below
Diagram illustrating anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters control
PARALLEL ELECTRICAL HEATERSParameter r12 enables the parallel electrical heaters function..
This function is useful if the system incorporates 2 hydraulic circuits, each with its own anti-freeze probe, and there is onlyone anti-freeze electrical heater.
The following conditions must apply for the function to be active:
• Pa r12 = 1• Pa r05 other than 0• Pa r06 other than 0.
Control is based on the minimum value detected by the 2 probes, using the set points of electrical heaters 1 (Pa r07 andPa r08)
If Pa r15= 1 the electrical heaters have a dual function, as anti-freeze electrical heaters and supplementary electricalheaters. If Pa r15 = 1 and the system is in heating mode., electrical heater 1 will start up under the command of its owncontrol or if ST1 <(SET HEATING-Pa r14) while heater 2 ) will start up if ST1 <(SET HEATING-Pa r15) . The control hysteresisis Pa C04 (heating control hysteresis).
7.3.6 Reversing valve controlThe reversing valves are turned off if Energy 400 is off or on stand-by;The valves are ON in cooling mode and OFF in heating and defrost modes.
diagram
Parallel electricalheaters
Supplementaryelectrical heaters
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 28
8 FUNCTIONSx
8.1 Recording hours of operation
The devices stores the number of hours of operation of the following in permanent memory:• hydraulic pump• compressors.
It is precise to within one minute.Hours of operation may be displayed by entering the appropriate menu with the label Ohr (refer to menu structure).The whole value is displayed if it is less than 999 hours; if it exceeds this value, the hundreds of hours will be shown andthe decimal point will appear:For example, 1234 hours will be displayed as follows:
To set the number of hours to zero, hold the DOWN key (refer to keys) down for two seconds while displaying the numberof hours of operation.
In the event of a power failure, the latest fraction of an hour recorded is set to 0, so that duration is rounded down:
8.2 Defrost
The defrost function is active in heating mode only.It is used to prevent ice formation on the surface of the external exchanger, which can occur in locations with lowtemperatures and high humidity and will considerably reduce the machine’s thermodynamic performance, creating a riskof damage to the machine.
Defrost start and end depends on the condensation probe values (refer to condensation probes– defrost) and the settingsof the parameters listed below:
8.2.1 Defrost startThe defrost starts as a result of three parameters:• Pa d02 : temperature/pressure at which defrost starts• Pa d03 : defrost interval
When the probe detects temperature/pressure values below the value of parameter Pa d02 it starts the timer, and whenthe number of minutes determined by parameter Pa d03 has expired the defrost will start;
The timer will stop if:• Temperature/pressure rises above the value of parameter Pa d02• The compressor is turned offThe timer will be set to zero if:• a defrost cycle is completed• “Energy 400” is turned off• operating mode is changed (refer to operating modes)• temperature rises above the value of parameter Pa d04 (defrost end temperature/pressure)
During the defrost the compressors are handled as follows:• combined defrost: all compressors are turned on at full power;• separate defrost: all compressors in the circuit being defrosted are turned on at full power;there may be a delay between compressor coming on and Defrost start imposed by parameter Pa d11
Defrost will take place only if the following conditions are met: :• The safety timing of compressors in the circuit must be 0• The delay between circuit defrosts must have expired since the last circuit defrost (Pa d08)
On a dual circuit machine with combined defrost, the following condition must apply:• in the circuit for which defrost start is not requested, compressor safety time = 0 (refer to safety timing) so that the
two circuits may both start a defrost at the same time.
If at the time of defrost start the compressor-4-way valve delay time Pa d06 = 0, the compressor will stay on; if not, theadjustment shown in the diagram below will be carried out.
Stopping timer
Setting timer tozero
Defrost:compressor
management
MEMORY
35.48
MEMORY
35
Power failure
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 29
8.2.2 Control during defrostDuring the defrost cycle loads are controlled as described below:
compressors in the circuit for which defrost is underway will be turned on to full power, if not already on at full power
The reversing valve in the circuit for which defrost is underway will behave the way it does in the summer cycle.When the valve is reversed, a timer begins counting the minimum by-pass time for the circuit involved, equal to “minimumby-pass time during cooling” (Pa A01).
If the condensation pressure detected falls below (Pa F23 — Pa F24), the fan will be OFF; if it exceeds Pa F23, the fan will beON. At the end of the drip stage, if parameter Pa D07 is not 0 the fans will operate at full speed for an amount of timeequal to Pa F25 in order to remove water from the batteries as quickly as possible.If there are no pressure probes on the machine, this will be applied to temperature.
8.2.3 Defrost endDefrost end may be determined by temperature/pressure values read by analogue probes ST3, ST2, ST6 (analogue inputs)or by digital input (digital inputs).
The configuration parameters are:• Pa d09 : Circuit 1 defrost end probe• Pa d10: Circuit 2 defrost end probe
Possible values and meanings of these parameters are shown below:
ValueParameters
Description
0 defrost end in response to digital input1 defrost end in response to ST32 defrost end in response to ST43 defrost end in response to ST6
If Pa d09=0 (defrost end in response to digital input) the digital input configured as “End of defrost circuit 1” (digitalinputs) will be taken into consideration; if Pa d10=0 input “circuit 2 defrost end”(digital inputs) .In this configuration, as soon as the input becomes active the circuit will have a defrost end.
If an analogue input is selected for defrost end, the defrost will end will pressure/temperature rises above the value ofparameter Pa d04 (defrost end temperature/pressure).
If the input is not configured, defrost will end only when pressure/temperature rises above the maximum duration set byparameter Pa d05
Defrost will always end if duration exceeds the maximum duration set by parameter Pa D05.
After defrost end, if drip time Pa d07= 0 the compressors will stay on; if not, the adjustment shown in the figure below willtake place:
diagram
Compressors
Reversing valve
Fans
Parameterconfiguration
Drip time
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 30
diagram
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 31
9 PARAMETERSx
Parameters make the ” Energy 400” a fully configurable device.They may be modified through:• instrument keyboard• Personal computer (with a suitable connection and “Param manager” software)
We will now take a detailed look at all the parameters, divided by category.
9.1 Description of Parameters
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS:Determine the features of the machine.
If one or more of the parameters in this category are modified, the cotnroller must be switched off after the modificationand switched on again to ensure correct operation.
Maximum set point during “heating”Upper limit on set point in “heating” modeMinimum set point during “heating”Lower limit on set point in “heating” modeMaximum set point during “cooling”Upper limit on set point in “cooling” modeMinimum set point during “cooling”Lower limit on set point in “cooling” modeNumber of circuits on machine (∗∗ )Number of cooling circuits0= not permitted1= 1 cooling circuit2= 2 cooling circuitsNumber of compressors per circuit (∗∗ )0= no compressors1= 1 compressor2= 2 compressors3= 3 compressors4= 4 compressorsNumber of capacity steps per compressor (∗∗ )0= no capacity steps1= 1 capacity step per compressor2= 2 capacity steps per compressor3= 3 capacity steps per compressorCompressor on sequence0= depending on hours of operation1= unvaried on sequence Compressor selection algorithm0= circuit saturation1= circuit balancing ST1 configurationUsed to configure analogue input ST10= No probe1= Inflowing air/water analogue input2= Heating request digital input3= Regulation algorithm request digital input4= NTC differential input ST2 configuration0= No probe1= Circuit 1 outflowing water/antifreeze/inlet air analogue input2= Cooling request digital input ST3 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= 4…20 mA condensation input3= 4…20 mA dynamic set point input4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 15= Regulation algorithm input in “heating” mode for water-water machines with manual reversal ST4 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= Multifunctional digital input3= Outdoor temperature analogue input ST5 configuration0= No probe1= Outflowing water/anti-freeze/inlet air analogue input, circuit 2 ST6 configuration0= No probe1= Condensation control analogue input2= 4…20 mA condensation input
∗ non sono ammesse configurazioni macchina con numero di gradini superiore a 4
Pa H01
Pa H02
Pa H03
Pa H04
Pa H05
Pa H06
Pa H07
Pa H08
Pa H09
Pa H11
Pa H12
Pa H13
Pa H14
Pa H15
Pa H16
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 32
3= Not permitted4= Antifreeze analogue input for water-water machines with gas reversal, circuit 2 Bottom of scale pressure valuePressure value corresponding to an analogue input value (ST3 or ST6) on the 20mA input (if configured as a current input).Example if using a pressure transducer with limits of 0-30.0 bar/4-20mA, set PaH17=300 Polarity of digital inputs ID1,ID2,ID3,ID4 Polarity of digital inputs ID5,ID6,ID7,ID8 Polarity of digital inputs ID9,ID10,ID11,ST4 Polarity of digital inputs ID12,ID13,ID14,ID15These parameters may be used to select the polarity which will activate the digital inputs to suit them to various operatingrequirements. Refer to Digital inputs: polarity when setting input polarity. Configuration of digital input ID1 Configuration of digital input ID2 Configuration of digital input ID3 Configuration of digital input ID4 Configuration of digital input ID5 Configuration of digital input ID6 Configuration of digital input ID7 Configuration of digital input ID8 Configuration of digital input ID9 Configuration of digital input ID10 Configuration of digital input ID11 Configuration of digital input ST4 if configured as digital
0 Input disabled 12 Low pressure circuit 11 Flow switch 13 Low pressure circuit 22 Remote OFF 14 High pressure compressor 13 Remote Heat/Cool 15 High pressure compressor 24 Thermal switch compressor 1 16 High pressure compressor 35 Thermal switch compressor 2 17 High pressure compressor 46 Thermal switch compressor 3 18 Defrost end circuit 17 Thermal switch compressor 4 19 Defrost end circuit 28 Thermal switch fan circuit 1 20 Request for power step 29 Thermal switch fan circuit 2 21 Request for power step 310 High pressure circuit 1 22 Request for power step 411 High pressure circuit 2
Configuration of output RL2 Configuration of output RL3 Configuration of output RL4 Configuration of output RL5 Configuration of output RL6 Configuration of output RL7These parameters are used to assign various functions to relays as required by the type of application.0= Not in use1= Reversing valve circuit 12= Reversing valve circuit 23= Condensation fan circuit 14= Condensation fan circuit 25= Electrical heater 16= Electrical heater 27= Hydraulic pump8= Evaporator fan9= Power Step 210= Power Step 311= Power Step 4 Polarity of output RL2 Polarity of output RL3 Polarity of output RL4 Polarity of output RL5 Polarity of output RL8Relay polarity may be set for the corresponding outputs.0=relay on if output active1=relay off if output not active Configuration of analogue output 1 (AN1 or TK1) Configuration of analogue output 2 (AN2 or TK2)Condensation fan control outputs are available with 2 types of signal.0= Suignal for phase cut fan control1= 4-20mA output Not in use Selection of operating mode0= Selection from keyboard1= Selection from digital input Enable dynamic set pointIf enabled, this function permits automatic variation of the working set point depending on outdoor temperature or on a4-20mA analogue input. The parameter has no meaning if PaH13≠3 or PaH14≠3.0= Function disabled1= Function enabled Maximum dynamic set point offset in cooling mode
Pa H17
Pa H18Pa H19Pa H20Pa H21
Pa H23Pa H24Pa H25Pa H26Pa H27Pa H28Pa H29Pa H30Pa H31Pa H32Pa H33Pa H34
Pa H35Pa H36Pa H37Pa H38Pa H39Pa H40
Pa H41Pa H42Pa H43Pa H44Pa H45
Pa H46Pa H47
Pa H48Pa H49
Pa H50
Pa H51
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 33
The maximum value that may be added to the set point in cooling mode (COO) when the DYNAMIC SET POINT function isenabled. Maximum dynamic set point offset in heating modeThe maximum value that may be added to the set point in heating mode (HEA) when the DYNAMIC SET POINT function isenabled. Outdoor temperature set point in cooling modeThe outdoor temperature value on the basis of which …The parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature set point in heating modeThe parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature differential in cooling modeThe parameter is significant only if the dynamic set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Outdoor temperature differential in heating modeThe parameter is significant only if the set point function is enabled and probe ST4 is configured as an outdoortemperature probe. Offset ST1, Offset ST2, Offset ST3These parameters may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature or pressure reading andthe actual temperature or pressure. Offset ST4 Offset ST5These parameters may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature reading and the actualtemperature. Offset ST6This parameter may be used to compensate the error that may occur between the temperature (or pressure) reading andthe actual temperture or pressure. Mains frequencyMains frequency 50 HzMains frequency 60 Hz Selection °C or °F0= degrees °C1= degrees °F Family serial address, Device serial addressThese parameters may be used to address the device when connected to a personal computer or supervision system.Normally both are 0. User passwordMay be used to enter a password for access to level two parameters, and to copy parameters from the instrument to thecopy card. Copy card write passwordThe password that must be entered to copy parameters to the copy card. Presence of keyboard
ALARM PARAMETERS:
Low pressure pressure switch by-pass time.Determines the delay between starting up the compressor and starting up the low pressure digital alarm diagnostics.Expressed in seconds. Low pressure alarm events per hourUsed to set the number of low pressure digital alarm events per hour beyond which the system will switch from automaticreset to manual reset. Bypass pump activation flow switchDetermines the delay between activation of the hydraulic pump and activation of the flow switch alarm diagnostics.Expressed in seconds. Duration of active flow switch inputMay be used to set the amount of time for which the flow switch digital input must remain active to generate a flowswitch alarm. The timer starts after the flow switch by-pass time. Expressed in seconds. Duration of inactive flow switch inputMay be used to set the time for which the flow switch digital input must remain inactive to be included in thecorresponding alarm. Expressed in seconds. Number of flow switch alarms/hourMay be used to set the number of flow switch digital alarms per hour after which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset . When this occurs, the hydraulic pump is deactivated. By-pass compressor thermal switch following compressor onDetermines the delay between compressor activation and activation of the compressor thermal switch digital diagnosticsalarm. Expressed in seconds.Compressor thermal switch alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of compressor thermal switch alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm is switchedfrom automatic to manual reset.Number of fan thermal switch events per hourMay be used to set a number of fan thermal events per hour beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset .Anti-freeze alarm by-passDetermines the delay between turning on the machine (selection of an operating mode or switch from OFF->ON) andactivation of the compressor thermal switch digital alarm diagnostics. Expressed in seconds.Anti-freeze alarm set point
Pa H52
Pa H53
Pa H54
Pa H55
Pa H56
Pa H57Pa H58Pa H59
Pa H60Pa H61
Pa H62
Pa H63
Pa H64
Pa H65Pa H66
Pa H67
Pa H68
Pa H68
Pa A01
Pa A02
Pa A03
Pa A04
Pa A05
Pa A06
Pa A07
Pa A08
Pa A09
Pa A10
Pa A11
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 34
May be used to set the temperature below which the anti-freeze alarm is triggered.Anti-freeze alarm hysteresisMay be used to set the differential value of the anti-freeze alarm.Anti-freeze alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of anti-freeze alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm is switched from automatic tomanual reset .Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation set pointMay be used to set a condensation pressure/temperature value beyond which the high pressure alarm will be triggered.Analogue input high pressure/temperature hysteresisMay be used to set the differential for the analogue high pressure alarm.Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation bypassDetermines the delay after turning on of the first compressor in the cooling circuit and activation of the correspondinganalogue input low pressure/temperature analogue alarm diagnostics.Analogue input low pressure/temperature activation set pointMay be used to set a temperature/pressure value below which the low pressure alarm will be triggered.Analogue input low pressure/temperature hysteresisMay be used to set the differential for the analogue low pressure/temperature alarm.Number of analogue input low pressure alarm events per hourMay be used to set a number of low pressure analogue alarm events per hour beyond which the alarm will be switchedfrom automatic to manual reset.Machine out of coolant differentialIf the difference between the absolute value of the set point and of the control probe exceeds this parameter, the machineout of coolant timer will start.Bypass machine out of coolantDetermines the delay between the turning on of the first compressor in the corresponding cooling circuit and activation ofthe machine out of coolant alarm diagnostics. Expressed in minutes.Duration of machine out of coolantDetermines the duration of the condition described under parameter A20 beyond which the machine out of coolant alarmwill be triggered.Machine out of coolant alarm triggeredEnables machine out of coolant alarm diagnostics0= diagnostics disabled1= diagnostics enabled Enable low pressure alarm during defrostingEnables the minimum alarm during defrosting.0= Low pressure alarm diagnostics disabled during defrosting1= Low pressure alarm diagnostics enabled during defrosting Input over-temperature set pointTemperature value ST1 above which the high temperature alarm E46 is triggered. Input over-temperature durationDetermines the duration of the condition described for parameter A25 beyond which the input over-temperature alarm istriggered.
COMPRESSOR PARAMETERS
OFF-ON safety timeThe minimum amount of time that must pass between turning off the compressor and turning it on again. Expressed intens of seconds.ON-ON safety timeThe minimum amount of time that must pass between turning the compressor on and turning it on again. Expressed intens of seconds.Hysteresis regulation algorithm during coolingMay be used to select intervention differential in cooling mode.Hysteresis regulation algorithm during heatingMay be used to select intervention differential in heating mode. Regulation algorithm step intervention differentialMay be used to set a temperature differential in relation to the set point beyond which the second step is activated. Compressor on intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning on of two compressors. Compressor off intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning off of two compressors. Capacity step on intervalMay be used to set a delay between turning on of compressor and of capacity steps.
FAN CONTROL PARAMETERS:
Fan output configuration0 = proportional fan output (from 0 to 100% depending on parameters)1 = fan output “on-off”; in this mode the regulation algorithm performs the same calculation as in proportional fanoutput, but if the result is greater than 0, regulation algorithmoutput will be 100.2 = on-off operation in response to request from compressor. In this mode output is 0 if no compressor in the circuit ison, or 100% if at least one compressor in the circuit is on.Fan pick-up timeTime for which fan runs at maximum speed after starting up. Expressed in seconds/10.Fan phase shiftThis parameter may be used to calibrate fan control output in proportion to the type of fan in use, adjusting it to suit thefan’s typical current/voltage phase shift.Impulse duration of triac onMay be used to vary the length of the impulse from the triac command.Functioning in resposne to compressor request
Pa A12
Pa A13
Pa A14
Pa A15
Pa A16
Pa A17
Pa A18
Pa A19
Pa A20
Pa A21
Pa A22
Pa A23
Pa A24
Pa A25
Pa A26
Pa C01
Pa C02
Pa C03
Pa C04
Pa C05
Pa C06
Pa C07
Pa C08
Pa F01
Pa F02
Pa F03
Pa F04
Pa F05
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 35
0= if compressor is off, fan is off1= condensation control independent of compressorMinimum speed during coolingMinimum value of proportional fan control during cooling. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Maximum silent speed during coolingMaximum value of proportional fan control during cooling. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during coolingCondensation pressure/temperature value below which the fan runs at minimum cooling speed.Proportional band during coolingTemperature/pressure differential corresponding to change from minimum to silent maximum fan speed during cooling(F07).Fan cut-off differentialCondensation temperature/pressure differential in relation to temperature/pressure set point (F08 or F14) beyond whichfan is cut off.Cut-off hysteresis.Condensation temperature/pressure differential for cut-off.Cut-off bypass timeDetermines the amount of time after fan start-up during which fan cut-off is excluded. Expressed in seconds.Maximum speed during coolingMay be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value in cooling mode.Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure during coolingCondensation pressure/temperature value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F13.Minimum speed during heatingMinimum proportional fan control value in heating mode. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Maximum silent speed during heatingMaximum value of proportional fan control during heating. Expressed as a percentage of the power supply voltage, from 0to 100%,.Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during heatingCondensation temperature/pressure value above which the fan operates at minimum heating speed.Proportional band during heatingTemperature/pressure differential corresponding to a change from minimum to maximum silent fan speed during heating(F16).Maximum speed during heatingMay be used to set a speed step corresponding to a given temperature/pressure value during heating.Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during heatingCondensation temperature/pressure value corresponding to the fan speed set for par. F19.Preventilation in cooling modeMay be used to set a preventilation time in cooling mode before compressor combines on in order to prevent.…Combined or separate fan controlParameter F22 may be used to configure dual circuit machines with a single condenser.Parameter F22 condensation type0= separate condensers1= combined condenser.If Pa F22 = 0 the fans are independent and depend on condensation pressure/temperature and the status of thecompressors in the circuits. If Pa F22= 1 the outputs of the 2 fans are parallel and they are controlled:on the basis of the greater of the two circuit condensation probes in cooling modeon the basis of the smaller of the two circuit condensation probes in heating modeIf there is no condensation probe in one of the 2 circuits, a configuration alarm will be generated. Fan activation temperature/pressure set point during defrostingDuring defrosting, if temperature/pressure exceeds the “fan activation during defrosting” threshold (Pa F23) the fans willcome on at full power.Fan activation hysteresis during defrostingCondensation temperature/pressure differential for fan control during defrosting.
PUMP PARAMETERS
Pump operating modeMay be used to determine pump operating mode:0=continuous operation1=operation in response to a request from the regulation algorithmDelay between pump ON and compressor ONMay be used to set a delay between starting a pump and starting a compressor, expressed in seconds.Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFFMay be used to set a delay between turning off a compressor and turning off a pump, expressed in seconds.
ANTI-FREEZE/BOILER PARAMETERS
Configuration of electrical heaters in defrost modeDetermines electrical heater operation during defrosting0=come on only in response to a request from the regulation algorithm1=always on during defrostingConfiguration of electrical heaters on in cooling modeDetermines electrical heater operation in cooling mode0=off during cooling1=on during cooling (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)Configuration of electrical heaters on in heating modeDetermines electrical heater operation in heating mode
Pa F06
Pa F07
Pa F08
Pa F09
Pa F10
Pa F11
Pa F12
Pa F13
Pa F14
Pa F15
Pa F16
Pa F17
Pa F18
Pa F19
Pa F20
Pa F21
Pa F22
Pa F23
Pa F24
Pa P01
Pa P02
Pa P03
Pa r01
Pa r02
Pa r03
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 36
0=off during heating1= on during cooling (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater regulation algorithm)Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probeConfiguration of electrical heater 2 control probeDetermines the control probes belonging to electrical heaters in heating mode0= Not present1=Control probe ST12=Control probe ST23= Control probe ST5Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on stand-byDetermines the status of electrical heaters when the instrument is OFF or on stand-by0=Always off when OFF or on stand-by1=On when OFF or on stand-by (in response to anti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm)Set point of anti-freeze electrial heater 1 in heating modeTemperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in heating mode.Set point of anti-freeze electrical heater 1 in cooling modeTemperature value below which anti-freeze electrical heater 1 comes on in cooling mode.Maximum set point of anti-freeze electrical heatersDetermines the maximum setting of the anti-freeze electrical heater set points.Minimum set point of anti-freeze electrical heatersDetermines the minimumsetting of the anti-freeze electrcial heater set points.Anti-freeze heater hysteresisAnti-freeze electrical heater control algorithm hysteresis.Set point of external anti-freeze electrical heatersTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters in the secondary circuit come on.Set point of electrical heater 2 in heating modeTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in heating mode.Set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling modeTemperature below which anti-freeze electrical heaters 2 come on in cooling mode.Enable supplementary electrical heaters
DEFROST PARAMETERS::
Defrost enabled0= defrost function enabled1= defrost function disabledDefrost start temperature / pressureTemperature/pressure below which the defrost cycle is started.Defrost interval (response time)Duration for which probe remains below defrost start temperature/pressure, expressed in minutes.Defrost end temperature/pressureTemperature/pressure above which defrost ends.Maximum defrost time (time-out)Maximum duration of defrost in minutes.Compressor-reversing valve wait time (anti-bleeding)Wait time between compressor going off and reversal of the 4-way valve at the beginning of the defrost cycle.Drip timeWait time at the end of the defrost cycle between the compressor going off and the reversal of the 4-way valve. Temperature at which defrost starts if Pa H49= 1Temperature below which the defrost cycle is started. Temperature at which defrost ends if Pa H49=1Temperature above which the defrost cycle is ended.
9.2 Parameters table
All ”Energy 400” parameters are listed in the table below.
CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS *Par. Description Value Limits Unit of meas.
Pa H01 Maximum set point during heating H02 ÷ 90.0 °CPa H02 Minimum set point during heating -40.0 ÷ H01 °CPa H03 Maximum set point during cooling H04 ÷ 90.0 °CPa H04 Minimum set point during cooling -40.0 ÷ H03 °CPa H05 Number of circuits on machine 0 ÷ 2 NumPa H06 Number of compressors per circuit 0 ÷ 4 NumPa H07 Number of capacity steps per compressor 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H08 Compressors on sequence 0÷1 FlagPa H09 Circuit balancing 0÷1 FlagPa H10 Presence of heat pump 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H11 Configuration ST1 0 ÷ 4 NumPa H12 Configuration ST2 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H13 Configuration ST3 0 ÷ 5 NumPa H14 Configuration ST4 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H15 Configuration ST5 0 ÷ 5 NumPa H16 Configuration ST6 0 ÷ 3 NumPa H17 Bottom of scale pressure value 0-350 KPa*10Pa H18 Polarity ID1 ID2 ID3 ID4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H19 Polarity ID5 ID6 ID7 ID8 0 ÷ 1 Flag
Pa r04Pa r05
Pa r06
Pa r07
Pa r08
Pa r09
Pa r10
Pa r11
Pa r12
Pa r13
Pa r14
Pa r15
Pa d01
Pa d02
Pa d03
Pa d04
Pa d05
Pa d06
Pa d07
Pa d08
Pa d09
Configurationparameters
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 37
Pa H20 Polarity ID9 ID10 ID11 ST4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H21 Polarity ST1 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H22 Polarity ST2 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H23 Configuration ID1 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H24 Configuration ID2 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H25 Configuration ID3 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H26 Configuration ID4 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H27 Configuration ID5 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H28 Configuration ID6 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H29 Configuration ID7 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H30 Configuration ID8 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H31 Configuration ID9 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H32 Configuration ID10 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H33 Configuration ID11 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H34 Configuration ST4 if digital input 0 ÷ 19 NumPa H35 Configuration relay 2 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H36 Configuration relay 3 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H37 Configuration relay 4 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H38 Configuration relay 5 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H39 Configuration relay 6 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H40 Configuration relay 7 0 ÷ 11 NumPa H41 Polarity RL2 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H42 Polarity RL3 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H43 Polarity RL4 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H44 Polarity RL5 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H45 Alarm relay polarity 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H46 Configuration fan 1 output 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H47 Configuration fan 2 output 0 ÷ 2 NumPa H48 Free 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H49 Selection of operating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H50 Enable dynamic set point 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H51 Offset of dynamic set point during cooling -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H52 Offset of dynamic set point during heating -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H53 Dynamic outdoor temp. set point during cooling 0 ÷ 255 °CPa H54 Dynamic outdoor temp. set point during heating 0 ÷ 255 °CPa H55 Delta dynamic outdoor temp. set point during cooling -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H56 Delta dynamic outdoor temp. set point during heating -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H57 Offset ST1 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H58 Offset ST2 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H59 Offset ST3 -127 ÷ 127 °C/10-Kpa*10Pa H60 Offset ST4 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H61 Offset ST5 -12.7 ÷ 12.7 °CPa H62 Offset ST6 -127 ÷ 127 °C/10-Kpa*10Pa H63 0=50 Hz 1=60 Hz 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa H64 0= °C 1=°F FlagPa H65 Family serial address 0 ÷ 14 Num.Pa H66 Device serial address 0 ÷ 14 Num.Pa H67 User password 0 ÷ 255 Num.Pa H68 Copy card password 0 ÷ 255 Num.
* If parameters in this category are modified, the controller must be turned off and on again to ensure correctfunctioning.
ALARM PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa A01 Low pressure switch bypass time after compressor on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A02 Low pressure alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A03 Flow switch bypass time after pump on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A04 Duration of active flow switch input 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A05 Duration of inactive flow switch input 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A06 Number of flow switch alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A07 Bypass compressor thermal switch from compressor on 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A08 Number of compressors 1 + 2 thermal switch alarms/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A09 Number of fan thermal switch alarm events/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A10 Anti-freeze alarm bypass after ON-OFF 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A11 Anti-freeze alarm activation set point -127 ÷ 127 °CPa A12 Hysteresis of anti-freeze alarm 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa A13 Anti-freeze alarm events/hour 0 ÷ 255 NumPa A14 Analogue input high pressure/temperature activation set
point0 ÷ 900 °C/10 – Kpa*10
Pa A15 Analogue input high pressure hysteresis 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A16 Analogue input low pressure activation bypass 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa A17 Analogue input low pressure activation set point -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A18 Analogue input low pressure hysteresis 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa A19 Analogue input low pressure alarm events per hour 0 ÷ 255 Num
Alarm parameters
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 38
Pa A20 Machine out of coolant differential 0 ÷ 255 °CPa A21 Machine out of coolant bypass 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A22 Machine out of coolant duration 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa A23 Machine out of coolant alarm triggered 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa A24 Enable low pressure alarm during defrost 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa A25 Input over-temperature set point 0 ÷ 255 °CPa A26 Input over-temperature duration 0 ÷ 255 S*10
COMPRESSOR PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa C01 ON-OFF safety time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa C02 ON-ON safety time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa C03 Hysteresis regulation algorithm during cooling 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa C04 Hysteresis regulation algorithm during heating 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa C05 Regulation algorithm step intervention deltaPa C06 Compressor – compressor on interval 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa C07 Compressor – compressor off interval 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa C08 Capacity step on interval 0 ÷ 255 Seconds
FAN CONTROL PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa F01 Fan output mode 0 ÷ 2 Num.Pa F02 Fan pick-up time 0 ÷ 255 Seconds/10Pa F03 Fan phase shift 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F04 Impulse duration of triak on 0 ÷ 255 uS*100Pa F05 Functioning in response to compressor request 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa F06 Minimum speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F07 Maximum silent speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F08 Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during
cooling-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10
Pa F09 Prop. band during cooling 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F10 Delta cut-off 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F11 Cut-off hysteresis. 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F12 Bypass time cut-off 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa F13 Max speed during cooling 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F14 Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during
cooling-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10
Pa F15 Minimum speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F16 Maximum silent speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F17 Minimum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during
heating-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10
Pa F18 Prop. band during heating 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F19 Maximum fan speed during heating 0 ÷ 100 %Pa F20 Maximum fan speed temperature/pressure set point during
heating-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10
Pa F21 Preventilation in cooling mode 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa F22 Combined or separate fan control 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa F23 Fan activation temperature/pressure set point during
defrosting-500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10
Pa F24 Fan activation hysteresis during defrosting 0 ÷ 255 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa F25 Preventilation after defrosting 0 ÷ 255 Seconds
PUMP PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa P01 Pump operating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa P02 Delay between pump ON and compressor ON 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa P03 Delay between compressor OFF and pump OFF 0 ÷ 255 Seconds
ELECTRICAL HEATER PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa r01 Configuration of electrical heaters in defrost mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa R02 Configuration of electrical heaters on in cooling mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r03 Configuration of electrical heaters on in heating mode 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r04 Configuration of electrical heater 1 control probe 0 ÷ 6 NumPa r05 Configuration of electrical heater 2 control probe 0 ÷ 6 NumPa r06 Configuration of electrical heaters when OFF or on STAND-BY 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r07 Set point of electrical heater 1 in heating mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r08 Set point of electrical heater 1 in cooling mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r09 Max. set point electrical heaters P r10 ÷ 127 °CPa r10 Min. set point electrical heaters -127 ÷ P r09 °CPa r11 hysteresis of anti-freeze heaters 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa R12 Set point of external anti-freeze electrical heaters Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r13 Set point of electrical heater 2 in heating mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °CPa r14 Set point of electrical heater 2 in cooling mode Pr09 ÷ Pr10 °C
Compressorparameters
Fan controlparameters
Pump parameters
Electrical heaterparameters
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 39
Pa r15 Enable supplementary electrical heaters 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa r16 Delta of activation of supplementary heater 1 0 ÷ 25.5 °CPa r17 Delta of activation of supplementary heater 2 0 ÷ 25.5 °C
DEFROST PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa d01 Defrost enabled 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa d02 Defrost start temperature/pressure -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 — Kpa*10Pa d03 Defrost interval 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa d04 Defrost end temperature/pressure -500 ÷ 800 °C/10 – Kpa*10Pa d05 Maximum defrost time 0 ÷ 255 MinutesPa d06 Compressor-reversing valve wait time 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa d07 Drip time 0 ÷ 255 SecondsPa d08 Delay between defrosting of circuits 0 ÷ 255 Seconds*10Pa d09 Output probe defrost circuit 1 0 ÷ 8 NumPa d10 Output probe defrost circuit 2 0 ÷ 8 NumPa d11 Delay in compressors on in defrost mode 0 ÷ 255 Seconds
EXTENSION PARAMETERSPar. Description Value Limits Unit of
measurementPa N01 Polarity of ID12 ID13 ID14 ID15 0 ÷ 1 FlagPa N02 Configuration ID12 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N03 Configuration ID13 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N04 Configuration ID14 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N05 Configuration ID15 0 ÷ 19 NumPa N06 Configuration relay 9 0 ÷ 11 NumPa N07 Configuration relay 10 0 ÷ 11 Num
Defrostparameters
Extensionparameters
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 40
10 DIAGNOSTICSx
“Energy 400” can perform full systems diagnostics and signal a series of alarms.Alarm trigger and reset modes are set using parameters Pa A01 – Pa A26.For some alarms the signal will not be given for a certain amount of time, determined by a parameter.For some alarms the number of alarm events is counted; if the number of alarm events in the past hour exceeds a certainthreshold set by a parameter, the alarm will switch from automatic to manual reset.Alarms are sampled every 113 seconds;Example: if the number of events/hour is set to 3, the duration of an alarm must fall between 2*113 seconds and 3*113seconds for the alarm to be switched from automatic to manual reset.
If an alarm is triggered more than once within one sampling period (113 seconds), only one alarm will be counted.
Alarms with manual reset are reset by pressing the ON-OFF button and releasing
Manual reset shuts down corresponding loads and requires an operator to intervene (reset the alarm using the ON-OFFcontrol).Manual reset alarms are used mainly to identify problems which could result in damage to the system
10.1 List of alarms
When an alarm is triggered, two things occur:• The corresponding loads are shut down• The alarm appears on the keyboard display
The alarm message consists of a code with the format “Enn” (where nn is a 2-digit number identifying the type of alarm,such as: E00, E25, E39….).All possible alarms are listed in the table below, along with their codes and the corresponding loads that will be shutdown:
Alarms
Alarm events perhour
Time225 s 225 s 225 s 225 s
1 2 3Counter
Alarm
Automatic reset Manual reset
Alarm sampling
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 41
LOADS SHUT DOWNCODE MESSAGE DESCRIPTIONCOMP.1 COMP.2 COMP.3 COMP.4 FAN1 FAN2 PUMP RES.1 RES.2
E00 Remote off • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Remote OFF”
(refer to digital inputs)
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E01 High pressure circuit 1 • Compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
circuit 1” (refer to digital inputs)
YES YES1 YES1 YES1
E02 Low pressure circuit 1 • Compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down; also condenserfans if condensation is separate for the 2 circuits (refer tocombined or separate condensation);
• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressurecircuit 1” (refer to digital inputs);
• Automatically reset unless alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A02, after which manually reset;
• Inactive during timer Pa A01 after compressor on or reversalof 4-way valve (reversing valve) in circuit 1
YES YES1 YES1 YES1 YES YES2
E03 Thermal switchprotection compressor 1
• Compressor 1 will be shut down;• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch
compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the
value of parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.
YES
E04 Thermal switchprotection condenserfan circuit 1
• Fans and compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down; if the 2circuits are set up for combined condensation, (refer tocombined or separate condensation) compressors in circuit 2will also be shut down;
• Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switchfan circuit 1” (refer to digital inputs);
• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A09, after which manually reset;
YES YES1 YES1 —
YES2YES1 —
YES2YES YES2
E05 Anti-freeze circuit 1 • Fans and compressors in circuit 1 will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST2 (refer to analogue inputs) is
configured as anti-freeze probe (Pa H12 = 1);• Triggered when probe ST2 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Turned off if probe ST2 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +
Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the
value of parameter Pa A13,after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on
with the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or from the digitalinput ON-OFF (refer to digital inputs) or when heating modeis started.
YES YES1 YES1 YES1 YES YES2
E06 Probe ST2 fault • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered if probe ST2, configured as an analogue input,
shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E07 Probe ST3 fault • All loads will be shut down;• Triggered if probe ST3, configured as an analogue input,
shorts or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
Tabella Allarmi
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 42
E08 External circuit 1 anti-freeze
• Fans and compressors will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST3 (refer to analogue inputs) is
configured as an external anti-freeze probe (Pa H13 = 4);• Active when probe ST3 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Goes off if probe ST3 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +
Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value
of parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on
using the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or ON-OFF digitalinput (refer to digital inputs) or heating mode is switched on.
YES YES YES YES YES YES
E09 High pressurecompressor 1
Compressor 1 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset
YES
E13 Thermal switchprotection compressor 2
Compressor 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch
compressor 2” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value of
parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor is turned on.
YES
E19 High pressurecompressor 2
Compressor 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
compressor 1” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset
YES
E21 High pressure circuit 2 Compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
circuit 2” (refer to digital inputs)
YES YES
E22 Low pressure circuit 2 Compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down, as well as condenserfans if the 2 circuits have separate condensation (refer tocombined or separate condensation);
Triggered by the digital input configured as “Low pressurecircuit 2” (refer to digital inputs);
Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A02, after which manually reset;
Inactive during timer Pa A01 after compressor on or reversal of4-way valve (reversing valve) of circuit 1
YES YES YES YES2
E23 Thermal switchprotection compressor 3
Compressor 3 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch
compressor 3” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach value of
parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.
YES
E24 Thermal switchprotection condenserfan circuit 2
Fans and compressors in circuit 2 will be shut down; if the 2 circuitshave combined condensation (refer to combined or separatecondensation) the compressors in circuit 1 will also be shutdown;
Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch circuit2 fan” (refer to digital inputs);
Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches value ofparameter Pa A09, after which manually reset;
YES2 YES2 YES YES YES2 YES
Anti-freeze circuit 2 Fans and compressors will be shut down; YES YES YES2 YES
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 43
Active if analogue probe ST5 (refer to analogue inputs) isconfigured as anti-freeze probe (Pa H15 = 1);
Triggered when probe ST5 detects a value below Pa A11;Turns off when probe ST5 detects a value above Pa A11 + Pa
A12;Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches value of
parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A10 after turning on Energy 400 using
On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or digital input ON-OFF(refer to digital inputs) or start of heating mode.
E26 Probe ST5 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST5, configured as an analogue input, shorts
or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E27 Probe ST6 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST6, configured as an analogue input, shorts
or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E08 External circuit 2 anti-freeze
• Fans and compressors will be shut down;• Active if analogue probe ST6 (refer to analogue inputs) is
configured as an external anti-freeze probe (Pa H13 = 4);• Active when probe ST6 detects a value lower than Pa A11;• Goes off if probe ST6 detects a value greater than Pa A11 +
Pa A12;• Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reach the value
of parameter Pa A13, after which manually reset;• Inactive during timer Pa A10 after Energy 400 is turned on
using the On-OFF key (refer to keyboard) or ON-OFF digitalinput (refer to digital inputs) or heating mode is switched on.
YES YES YES YES YES YES
E29 High pressurecompressor 3
Compressor 3 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
compressor 3” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset
YES
E33 Thermal switchprotection compressor 4
Compressor 4 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “Thermal switch
compressor 4” (refer to digital inputs);Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches the value of
parameter Pa A07, after which manually reset;Inactive during timer Pa A08 after compressor on.
YES
E39 High pressurecompressor 4
Compressor 4 will be shut down;Triggered by the digital input configured as “High pressure
compressor 4” (refer to digital inputs);Always manually reset
YES
E40 Probe ST1 fault All loads will be shut down;Triggered if probe ST1, configured as an analogue input, shorts
or is cut off or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C.. 100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E41 Flow switch All compressors, fans and pump will be cut off if manuallyreset;
Triggered if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (referto digital inputs) remains active for an amount of timeequal to Pa A04;
Goes off if the digital input configured as “Flow switch” (referto digital inputs) remains inactive for an amount of timeequal to Pa A05;
YES YES YES YES YES YES SI3
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 44
Automatically reset until alarm events per hour reaches thevalue of parameter Pa A06 , after which manually reset;
Inactive during timer Pa A03 following pump on.E42 Probe ST4 fault All loads will be shut down;
Triggered if probe ST4, configured as an analogue input,shorts, is cut off, or probe limits are exceeded (-50°C..100°C).
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E45 Configuration error All loads will be shut down;Triggered if at least one of the following conditions apply:H11= 2 (ST1 configured as request for heating), H12= 2 (ST2
configured as request for cooling) and both inputs areactive.
Sum of compressors and capacity steps on machine exceeds 4The keyboard is declared present (Pa H69=1) and there is no
communication between the keyboard and the basic unit.
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
E46 All loads will be shut down except the pump;Triggered if probe ST1 (refer to analogue inputs) has a value
exceeding Pa A25 for an amount of time exceeding Pa 26in cooling mode;
Goes off if probe ST1 (refer to analogue inputs) has a valuelower than Pa A25 – Pa A12;
Automatically reset.
YES YES YES YES YES YES YES YES
1 If it belongs to circuit 12 If combined condensation system3 Only if manual reset e
outputs defined as capacity steps will go off if there is an alarm for the compressor to which they belong
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 45
The tables below list alarms by type (digital or analogue).
TABLE OF DIGITAL ALARMS:
Alarm name Bypass trigger event Bypass time Triggerduration
Deactivationduration
N. alarmevents/hour
Compressor 1,2,3,4 highpressure alarm
None absent absent absent Manual reset
High pressure circuitalarm
None absent absent absent Manual reset
Low pressure alarm A compressor comingon in the circuit orreversal of 4-wayvalve
Pa A01 absent absent Pa A02
Flow switch alarm Pump coming on Pa A03 Pa A04 Pa A05 Pa A06Compressor 1,2,3,4thermal switch alarm
Compressor comingon
Pa A07 absent absent Pa A08
Fan 1,2 thermal switchalarm
None absent absent absent Pa A09
TABLE OF ANALOGUE ALARMS:
Alarm name Event Bypasstime
Triggerset point
Hysteresis N. alarmevents/hour
Regulation probe
Anti-freezealarm circuit1
On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off
Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive
Pa A13 ST2 if configuration parameter PaH12 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive
Anti-freezealarm circuit2
On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off
Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive
Pa A13 ST5 if configuration parameter PaH15 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive
Externalanti-freezealarmcircuit 1
On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off
Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive
Pa A13 ST3 if configuration parameter PaH13 = 4, otherwise alarm isinactive
Externalanti-freezealarm circuit2
On Off, inputin heatingmode, remoteon off
Pa A10 Pa A11 Pa A12positive
Pa A13 ST6 if configuration parameter PaH16 = 4, otherwise alarm isinactive
Low pressure/lowtemperaturecondensationalarm circuit1
Compressorturned on orreversal of 4-way valve
Par A16 Pa A17 Pa A18positive
Pa A19 ST3 se Pa H13=1 or 2 or else ST4if Pa H14 = 1, otherwise alarm isinactive
Low pressure/lowtemperaturecondensationalarm circuit2
Compressorturned on orreversal of 4-3way valve
Par A16 Pa A17 Pa A18positive
Pa A19 ST6 if Pa H16=1, otherwise alarmis inactive
Highpressure/hightemperaturecondensationalarm circuit1
None absent Pa A14 Pa A15negative
Manual reset ST3 if Pa H13=1 or 2, or ST4 if PaH14 = 1; otherwise alarm isinactive
Highpressure/hightemperaturecondensationalarm circuit2
None absent Pa A14 Pa A15negative
Manual reset ST6 if Pa H16=1 or 2, otherwisealarm is inactive
Hightemperatureregulationalgorithmalarm*
None absent Pa A25 Pa A12negative
Automaticreset
ST1
Digital alarms
Analogue alarms
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 46
11 TECHNICAL FEATURESx
11.1 Technical data
Typical Min. Max.Power supply voltage 12V~ 10V~ 14V~Power supply frequency 50Hz/60Hz — —Power 5VA — —Insulation class 1 — —Protection grade Front panel
IP0— —
Operating temperature 25°C 0°C 60°COperating humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%
Storage temperature 25°C -20°C 85°CStorage humidity (non-condensing) 30% 10% 90%
11.2 Electromechanical features
110/230 V digital outputs n° 8 5 A resistive relays; ¼ hp 230VAC; 1/8 hp 125VACAnalogue outputs n° 2 triac piloting outputs or configurable 4-20 mA outputs
n° 1 4-20 mA outputAnalogue inputs n° 4 NTC R25 10KΩ
N° 2 configurable input or 4-20mA o r NTC R25 10KΩDigital inputs n° 11 voltage-free digital inputs 10m ATerminals and connectors n° 1 10-way high voltage connectors, step 7.5
n° 2 16-way rapid clamp connectors for low voltage, step 4.2, AWG 16-28n° 1 p2.5 5–way connector for remote control and programming withexternal copy card, AWG 24-30n° 1 20-way connector for connection of extensionn° 1 3-way screw terminal for remote keyboard
Serial ports n° 1 9600 serial portn° 1 2400 serial port
The instrument must be powered with a suitable current transformer with the following features:
• Primary voltage: 230V~-15%÷+6%; 110V~±10%• Secondary voltage: 12V~• Power supply frequency: 50Hz; 60Hz• Power: 5VA;
11.3 Regulations
The product complies with the following European Community Directives:• Council Directive 73/23/CEE and subsequent modifications• Council directive 89/336/CEE and subsequent modifications
and complies with the following harmonised regulations:• LOW VOLTAGE: EN60730• EMISSION: EN50081-1 (EN55022)• IMMUNITY: EN50082-1 (IEC 801-2,3,4)
currenttransformer
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 47
12 USE OF THE DEVICEx
12.1 Permitted use
This product is used to control single and dual circuit chillers and heat pumps.
To ensure safety, the controller must be installed and operated in accordance with the instructions supplied, and access tohigh voltage components must be prevented under regular operating conditions. The device shall be properly protectedagainst water and dust and shall be accessible by using a tool only. The device is suitable for incorporation in a householdappliance and/or similar air conditioning device.According to the reference regulations, it is classified:• In terms of construction, as an automatic electronic control device to be incorporated with independent assembly or
integrated;• In terms of automatic operating features, as a type 1 action control device, with reference to manufacturing
tolerances and drifts;• As a class 2 device in relation to protection against electrical shock;• As a class A device in relation to software structure and class.
12.2 Forbidden use
Any use other than the permitted use is forbidden.Please note that relay contacts supplied are functional and are subject to fault (in that they are controlled by an electroniccomponent and be shorted or remain open); protection devices recommended by product standards or suggested bycommon sense in response to evident safety requirements shall be implemented outside of the instrument.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 48
13 RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKSx
Microtech shall not be held liable for any damage incurred as a result of:• installation/use other than those intended, and, in particular, failure to comply with the safety instructions specified
by applicable regulations and/or provided in this document;• use with equipment which does not provide adequate protection against electric shocks, water and dust under the
effective conditions of installation;• use with equipment which permits access to hazardous parts without the use of tools;• installation/use with equipment which does not comply with current regulations and legislation.
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 49
14 GLOSSARYx
Multiple inputs with an OR relationship to one another are equivalent to a single input with the following status:• Active if at least one input is active• Inactive if no input is active
To “Scroll up” a menu means listing the various parameters from the bottom up (Pa10 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 08 ….)
Indicates that the instrument is waiting, in stand-by mode; all functions are suspended.
Set to zero.
Resetting an alarm means reactivating it ready for a new signal.
A manual reset alarm must be reset using the keyboard.
To “Scroll down” in a menu is to list parameters from the top down (Pa08 -> Pa 09 -> Pa 10 ….)
Means flashing; normally refers to leds
Average number of hours is the ratio between the total number of hours for which the compressors are available and thenumber of compressors in the circuit
Devices in the system, including compressors, fans, hydraulic pump, electrical anti-freeze heaters…
A reference value (set by the user) defining the system’s operating status, such as the thermostat that controlstemperature in the home: if we want to maintain a temperature of 20 °C we set the set point to 20°C (the heating systemwill come on if the temperature in the house falls below 20°C, and go off if it exceeds this value).
Values falling within a given interval; Range 1…100 indicates all values between 1 and 100
A hysteresis is normally defined around a set point to prevent frequent oscillation of the change of status of the load beingcontrolled;Example: suppose we have a set point of 20 °C on a probe for measurement of room temperature, above which acompressor will be started up;When room temperature nears the set point (20 °C) there will be an unstable phase during which the relay which starts upthe compressor will frequently switch from ON to OFF and vice versa, which could result in serious damage to the system.To prevent this problem a hysteresis is defined: an interval of tolerance within which there will be no change in status; inour example, we could set a hysteresis of 1 °C, in which case the compressor would be started up at 21 °C (set point +hysteresis) and turned off at 19 °C (set point – hysteresis)
Memory in which data is maintained even when the device is turned off (as distinct from temporary memory, the data inwhich is lost when the device is turned off.)
Temperature/pressure below or above which proportional output is cut off.
OR logico
Scroll up
Stand-by
Reset
Reset alarm
Manual reset
Scroll down
BLINK
Average numberof hours
Loads
Set Point
Range
Hysteresis
Permanentmemory
Cut-off
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 50
15 ANALITIC INDEX
AAlarm events per hour ………………………………….40Alarm parameters ………………………………………..37Alarms …………………………………………………………..40Analogue alarms ………………………………………….45Analogue inputs …………………………………………….6
configuration table …………………………………7resolution and precision……………………………7
Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heatercontrol……………………………………………………….27diagram……………………………………………………..27
Anti-freeze/supplementary electrical heaters…………………………………………………………………..19configuration ………………………………………….19probe configuration…………………………………19
Average number of hours…………………………….49BBLINK …………………………………………………………….49CCF (Control Fan) Modules ……………………………..5Combined or Separate Condensation…………26Components……………………………………………………5Compressor (or power step) on/off sequences
…………………………………………………………………..16Compressor configuration……………………………15
Simple compressors…………………………………15with 1 capacity step…………………………………15with 2 or 3 capacity steps………………………..15
Compressor control – regulation algorithm.23Cooling diagram ……………………………………..23Heating diagram……………………………………….24
Compressor parameters……………………………….38Compressor timing ……………………………………….17
Off-on and on-on diagram for 1compressor …………………………………………..17
Off-on timing ……………………………………………17on-on and off-off diagram 2 comp………..18On-on off-off times for 2 comp……………..17On-on timing…………………………………………….17
Compressor timing: ………………………………………18Compressors………………………………………………….15
coming on on the basis of hours ofoperation and circuit balancing …….16
coming on on the basis of hours ofoperation and circuit saturation ……16
unvaried on sequence with circuitbalancing …………………………………………….17
unvaried on sequence with circuitsaturation ……………………………………………17
Condensation fan …………………………………………18Condensation fan control…………………………….24
Cool mode ………………………………………………..24
Heat mode ………………………………………………. 25Condensation-Defrost probes …………………….. 19
probe configuration …………………………….. 20separate or combined condensation .. 20
Configuration of analogue inputs …………………6Configuration of digital inputs………………………8Configuration of fan outputs…………………………9Configuration of outputs ……………………………….9Configuration parameters ………………………….. 36Connection diagrams……………………………………..6Control during defrost ………………………………… 29
Compressors…………………………………………….. 29Fans ………………………………………………………….. 29Reversing valve ………………………………………… 29
Cooling ………………………………………………………… 21Copy Card …………………………………………………5; 14Cross references ………………………………………………4current transformer …………………………………….. 46Cut-off …………………………………………………………. 49DDefrost …………………………………………………………. 28
compressor management ………………………. 28Defrost end ………………………………………………….. 29
diagram ……………………………………………………. 30Parameter configuration………………………… 29
Defrost parameters……………………………………… 39Defrost start ………………………………………………… 28
diagram ……………………………………………………. 29Setting timer to zero………………………………. 28Stopping timer………………………………………… 28
Description of Parameters ………………………….. 31Device off……………………………………………………… 21DIAGNOSTICS ……………………………………………… 40Differential temperature control………………… 24Digital alarms ……………………………………………… 45Digital inputs ………………………………………………….8
Configuration Table…………………………………8polarity………………………………………………………..8Polarity table ………………………………………………8
Display …………………………………………………………. 10Drip time ……………………………………………………… 29Dynamic Set point ………………………………………. 21
Control parameters ………………………………… 22Modification depending on current input
with negative offset……………………………. 22Modification depending on current input
with positive offset……………………………… 22Modification depending on outdoor
temperature with negative offset……… 23Modification depending on outdoor
temperature with positive offset………. 22
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 51
EElectrical heater parameters ……………………….38Electromechanical features………………………….46Energy 400 ………………………………………………………5Extension…………………………………………………………5Extension parameters …………………………………..39FFan configuration …………………………………………18
selection of output type…………………………..18Fan control configuration……………………………18Fan control in cool mode
diagram……………………………………………………..25Fan control in heat mode
diagram……………………………………………………..25Fan control parameters ……………………………….38Forbidden use ……………………………………………….47FUNCTIONS…………………………………………………..28GGLOSSARY ……………………………………………………..49HHeating………………………………………………………….21HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL …………………………4Hydraulic pump ……………………………………………19Hydraulic pump control……………………………….26
diagram……………………………………………………..26Hysteresis ………………………………………………………49IIcons for emphasis: …………………………………………4Impulse duration ………………………………………….18INSTALLATION ……………………………………………….6Internal fan …………………………………………………..19INTRODUCTION ……………………………………………..5KKeyboard……………………………………………………….10Keyboards ……………………………………………………….5Keys ……………………………………………………………….10
Mode …………………………………………………………10LLed …………………………………………………………………10List of alarms ………………………………………………..40Load control………………………………………………….23Loads……………………………………………………………..49Low voltage outputs ………………………………………9MManual reset …………………………………………………49Menu structure……………………………………………..13OOperating modes ………………………………………….21
configuration table…………………………………..21OR logico ………………………………………………………49Outputs …………………………………………………………..9PParallel electrical heaters…………………………….27Param Manager ……………………………………………..5
PARAMETERS ………………………………………………. 31Parameters table…………………………………………. 36Permanent memory…………………………………….. 49Permitted use ………………………………………………. 47Phase shift……………………………………………………. 18Physical quantities and units of measurement
…………………………………………………………………….9Pick-up …………………………………………………………. 18Power outputs…………………………………………………9
Configuration table…………………………………….9Polarity Table ……………………………………………9
Power step……………………………………………………. 15Programming parameters – Menu levels …… 11Pump parameters ……………………………………….. 38RRange …………………………………………………………… 49Recording hours of operation …………………….. 28References ……………………………………………………….4Regulation algorithm in cool mode…………… 23Regulation algorithm in heat mode ………….. 23Regulations………………………………………………….. 46Remote keyboard………………………………………… 11Reset …………………………………………………………….. 49Reset alarm………………………………………………….. 49RESPONSIBILITY AND RESIDUAL RISKS……… 48Reversing valve ……………………………………………. 19Reversing valve control……………………………….. 27Reversing valves…………………………………………… 19SSafety timing ……………………………………………….. 17Scroll down ………………………………………………….. 49Scroll up ………………………………………………………. 49selection ………………………………………………………….9Serial Interface (EWTK)…………………………………..5Serial outputs………………………………………………….9Set Point ………………………………………………………. 49Setting set points ………………………………………… 21Stand-by …………………………………………………21; 49SUMMARY ………………………………………………………2Supplementary electrical heaters ………………. 27SYSTEM CONFIGURATION………………………….. 15TTabella Allarmi……………………………………………. 41Technical data…………………………………………….. 46TECHNICAL FEATURES………………………………… 46TEMPERATURE CONTROL FUNCTIONS……… 21UUnit of measurement: …………………………………….9USE OF THE DEVICE …………………………………….. 47USER INTERFACE …………………………………………. 10VVisibility of parameters and submenus ……… 14WWall-mounted keyboard…………………………….. 11
ENERGY 400 Rel. 02.00 03- 2000 / Ing 52
Microtech s.r.l.via dell’Industria, 15Zona Industriale Paludi32010 Pieve d’Alpago (BL)ITALY
Telephone +39 0437 986444Facsimile +39 0437 986163Email [email protected] http:/www.microtech.com
An Invensys company
- Forum
- TECHNICAL REFRIGERATION
- Controls
- Microtech (Invensys) Energy 400 password
-
Microtech (Invensys) Energy 400 password
Hi,
New to the forum,
Does anyone know the password to allow you to view/adjust parameters on a Microtech Energy 400 controller?
I have the Tech manual etc but it does not appear to be written in there.
Many thanks,
Steve

Posting Permissions
- You may not post new threads
- You may not post replies
- You may not post attachments
- You may not edit your posts
- BB code is On
- Smilies are On
- [IMG] code is On
- [VIDEO] code is On
- HTML code is Off
Forum Rules